Home

Ford 2009 E-150 Automobile User Manual

1. WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The Safety Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Safety Canopy system its fuses the A B C or D pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy See your authorized dealer WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety Canopy system is provided WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy 159 Seating and Safety Restraints How does the Safety Canopy system work The design and development of the Safety Canopy system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy The Safety Canopy system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon curtain with a gas generator concealed behind the headliner and above the doors one on each side of vehicle e A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy deployment OS gt he e The same readiness airbag light electronic control and diagnostic uni
2. SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song s title in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 song titles If you attempt to save more than 20 titles the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved titles and press A IV to cycle through the saved titles When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display 32 Entertainment Systems e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system
3. 720000809058 9 2000090010 01004 VW LOOWS I LpLe CAUTION TOBE RENOVED BY CUSTONER ONLY 101 Locks and Security POWER DOOR LOCKS e Press the Qo control to unlock all X doors e Press the control to lock all doors Smart locks This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open one of the front doors or the liftgate and you lock the vehicle with the power door lock control on the driver or passenger door trim panel all the doors will lock then all doors will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition by locking the driver s door with a key using the lock control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or locking the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad if equipped If both front doors and the liftgate are closed the vehicle can be locked from any method regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not Autolock feature The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is in the on position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while th
4. 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK gt to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press d SEEK to view the previous display text In satellite radio mode if equipped press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the 37 Entertainment Systems selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn on off Turn to increase decrease volume Oh Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back
5. 37 108 Climate control 247 15A 15A 15A OA 10A 10A OA 5A 5A 5A 10A 10A 10A 5A 10A 5A 10A Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating Subwoofer amplifier 39 Radio Not used spare Automatic dimming rear view mirror Not used spare Rear wiper logic Customer accessory feed 5A 7 5A Occupant classification sensor OCS Passenger airbag deactivation indicator PADI light Breaker C o Delayed accessory relay O Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads a a Front wiper logic WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 248 Roadside Emergencies Q ace sone TEE nF oa C faa JEEE The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box PT Not used 2 Blower motor relay PT CC Not used 60A Cooling fan vehicles without trailer tow e om Cooting fan Craller tow ony PN sed e or attemator o
6. 180 F 200 F 82 C 93 C High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range MIN KSI MAX BSS may result in transmission failure C An overfill condition of transmission ai fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motor
7. 283 replacing wiper blades 284 Wrecker towing ceeeee 264
8. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 167 Seating and Safety Restraints When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling e Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to step
9. To turn on the map lamps press the outer edge of the clear lens The front row map lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated until the courtesy lamps come on e the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off Ambient lighting if equipped Iluminates footwells storage bins and cupholders with a choice of several colors The ambient lighting sa control switch is located on the center console To activate press and release the control to cycle through the color choices plus the off state The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either the on or accessory position Note The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory delay timer expires 66 Map dome lamp if equipped The dome lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated up until the courtesy lamps come on and e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of the lens Rear courtesy lamp Located in the rear cargo area the courtesy lamp lights when e any door is opened e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly
10. e If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position e If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors or the liftgate was opened the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position e The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position 113 Locks and Security SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED You can use the keyless entry keypad to e lock or unlock the doors without l 4 E5 TE 9 using a key e recall memory seat power mirrors positions if equipped The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create up to three of your own 5 digit personal entry codes When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to memory seats and mirrors if equipped To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 For memor
11. e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time 151 Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system will turn off the passenger seatmounted side airbag if e the seat is empty and safety belt is unbuckled The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel above the climate controls Note The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster
12. s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all songs from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Use A IV to manually increase decrease Press MENU again to disengage clock mode
13. 1 Unlock the liftgate with the integrated keyhead transmitter or power door unlock control 2 To open the liftgate press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle Note For the best performance allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the control Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system s obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation To power close the liftgate with the rear cargo area control button Press and release the control on the left rear quarter panel to close the liftgate Note The rear cargo area control button is disabled when the liftgate is latched fully closed WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch 97 Driver Controls Note The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second press of the instrument panel or the rear cargo area control button or a second double press of the integrated keyhead transmitter button To manually operate the liftgate 1 Disable the liftgate power function Refer to the Message Center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 2 Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate Refer to Manual liftgate in this chapter Note In case of operation in extreme cold 40 F 40 C or on extreme inclines manual operation of the liftgate is suggested Obstacle detection The power liftgate system is equippe
14. Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level 133 Seating and Safety Restraints Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the
15. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal e Normally adding 1 gallon 8 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The service engi
16. Loaded vehicles with higher centers of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle When the rail system is loaded check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop 100 Locks and Security KEYS Your vehicle is equipped with two Integrated Keyhead Transmitters CKTs The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle and the transmitter portion functions as the remote entry transmitter ha A Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle using a non programmed key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your authorized dealer supplied IKTs replacement IKTs are available through your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section later in this chapter Note Your vehicle s IKTs were ee issued with a security label that iOSIAV provides important vehicle key cut A information It is recommended that you keep the label in a safe place for future reference
17. Safety defects reporting 272 Safety restraints 132 136 140 Belt Minder 142 extension assembly 141 for adults cc eee 137 139 FOPCHUKEN csccdsycacdsesdeceversesseess 162 Occupant Classification SENSON sosirea rianan ea 134 warning light and CHIME oone 141 142 Safety restraints LATCH ANCHOMS segrare aen n 171 Safety seats for children 167 Safety Compliance Certification Label 0 0000 316 Satellite Radio Information 52 DOU 25 25 E EE 120 child safety seats 000 000000 167 easy access easyout feature eresas ireen 127 front Seats srcsiciarnioneroiias 123 heated ssieaiedensetsaereeess 58 127 memory Seat 110 126 Second row power fold seat 130 SecuriCode keyless entry SYSTE era e aE ER 114 SecuriLock passive anti theft SyS LEN TEANA 115 Servicing your vehicle 280 Setting the clock AM FM single CD 33 AM FM In dash 6 CD 00 41 SOS Post Crash Alert 162 Spare tire see Changing the TIPE J erae 255 Spark plugs specifications 0 0 0 311 315 327 Index Specification chart TUDrICANES eeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeees 312 Speed Control cececeeseeeeeeees 80 Starting your vehicle 215 217 JUMP starting ssinicins eresi 258 Steering wheel CONUOIS era aE ETE 82 HICE aniems 73 SYNG iTr OEE 55 T Tilt steering wheel 0 8 73 Tire Pressure Monitoring Syst
18. fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S 270 Customer Assistance If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48
19. fluid checking 308 fluid refill capacities 312 fluid specification 0 0 312 Auxiliary input jack Line in 47 Auxiliary power point 75 Axle lubricant specifications 312 B Battery seccisdazecHotiesssidectesestaacteesic 288 acid treating emergencies 288 jumping a disabled battery 258 maintenance free ccceeeees 288 replacement specifications 311 SETVICING sisscsseuysscvcsnestavecncenerne 288 Belt Minder cccccccceeeseeees 142 Blind Spot Spotter Mirror 234 Booster S ats cccccsccceesseeeeees 176 BY alk deciciissvesdidasaeviaiesieavesasseeia 220 ANTUIFIOCK srneci r 220 anti lock brake system ABS warning light 000 eee 221 fluid checking and adding 307 fluid refill capacities 312 fluid specifications 312 lubricant specifications 312 parking weeer iror Ea 221 shift interlock c eee 227 BUDS recaer ITE 67 C Capacities for refilling fluids 312 Car2U garage door opener 89 Cargo management system 99 Cargo Neb aisiaiwcisiesveiaceeensuieeinces 99 Cell phone use ooo ecceeeetseeeeeeteees 8 Changing a tire 0 252 255 Child safety seats 0 0 167 attaching with tether SULADS cteescssarsstescnsidudtaxtexsecte athe 173 in front Sat oo ce eeeeeees 167 IM TEAL SEAL cisssiec neck ede veectecns 167 LATCH aotan pe i 171 recommendations cccc
20. from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms 233 Driving BLIND SPOT MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex spotter mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the outside mirrors They are designed to assist the driver by increasing visibility along the side of the vehicle For more information on your side view mirrors refer to Exterior Mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter Driving with blind spot mirrors Before a lane change check the main mirror first then check the blind spot mirror If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance signal that you are going to change lanes Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes When the approaching vehicle is at a distance its image is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror As the vehicle approaches the image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror 1 As the vehicle approaches its image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror 2 As the vehicle leaves the bl
21. of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty CABIN AIR FILTER IF EQUIPPED The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of airborne particles such as dust spores and pollen in the air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle The presence of a particulate filter element provides the following benefits e Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration e Improves the interior compartment cleanliness e Protects the climate control components from particle deposits Note A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign objects from entering the system Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system If your vehicle is not equipped with a cabin air filter a protective screen has been provided in its place and must remain installed at all times The access door for the filter is located behind the glove box For replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter see the scheduled maintenance information For more information regarding your filter see your authorized dealer 61 Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL Rotate the headlamp control to the first position PS to turn on the parking lamps Rotate to the second position ZD to turn on the headlamps Rotate back to O to turn the headlamps off Autolam
22. ready for I M testing if the service engine soon Cc indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated 306 Maintenance and Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines D
23. speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire e Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires 183 Tires Wheels and Loading Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary an
24. the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed The light or message can come on after several driving events after you ve refueled your vehicle At the next opportunity safely pull off of the road remove the fuel filler cap align the cap properly and reinstall it The check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message may not reset immediately it may take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city and highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message on may cause the service engine soon K light to turn on as well If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap is not used WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others 298 Maintenance and Specifications WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel ca
25. 5L Class II 8620 8910 0 3500 0 1588 0 350 0 159 towing optional WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury 210 Tires Wheels and Loading Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle s bumper or attach to the axle You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the hook retainers on the hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Be sure your trailer conforms to all applicable local and Federal Regulations regarding trailer braking If your trailer is equipped with electronically controlled brakes you will need to have an electronic brake co
26. ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Exterior style Bug shields Deflectors Chrome wheels Chrome door handles Painted front grilles Interior style Ambient lighting Backlit door sill plates Electrochromic compass te
27. AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 6 C air through the instrument panel 1 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the vents and center console vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also airflow in the vehicle 2 Air flow selections Controls help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle the distribution of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief i description on each control setting MAX A C Distributes recirculated 74 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and center console vents lt A Distributes air through the instrument panel vents center console vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents O OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off A Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents Note You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the defroster vents and demister vents TH Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents 7 Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog or thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging 3 A Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle c
28. C system For maximum cooling performance in max A C mode e Automatic operation Press AUTO for full automatic operation Do not override A C or A recirculated air Set the temperature to 60 F 16 C Manual operation Select W or H 2 Select A C and A recirculated air Use A recirculated air with A C to provide colder airflow 3 Set the temperature to 60 F 16 C 4 Set highest fan setting initially then adjust to maintain comfort 60 e w Dhe r Climate Controls To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER Gy The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice The engine must be running to operate the rear window defroster Press the control to turn the rear window defroster on An indicator light on the button will illuminate when active The rear window defroster turns off automatically after 15 minutes or when the engine is turned off To manually turn off the rear window defroster at any time press the control again If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors the same button will activate both Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
29. HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 86 Driver Controls 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming During programming your hand held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After comp
30. INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use W to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type Press OK to close and return to the main menu To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release lt q SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYT etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use A IV to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A IV to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu SPEED VOL Speed sensitive volume Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensat
31. Maintenance and Specifications Continued operation will increase the engine temperature e The engine will completely shut down e Steering and braking effort will increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important saf
32. Manual override controls Allows you to manually select where airflow is distributed Press to select an air distribution mode listed below The selected mode will illuminate in the display To return to full automatic control press AUTO T Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging A Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Note You may notice a small amount of air flowing from the defroster vents and demister vents A Distributes air through the instrument panel vents center console vents located on the back of the center console floor vents and rear seat floor vents 74 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and center console vents located on the back of the center console 9 a Driver heated seat control Press to control the driver heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 10 Fan Speed Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed To return to automatic fan operation press AUTO 11 OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate 12 Driver side temperature control Press to increase decrease the temperature on the driver side of the vehicle in dual zone or the temperature of bo
33. Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy 302 Maintenance and Specifications You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy W
34. Press OK to close and return to the main menu AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A IV to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets Press OK to close and return to the main menu RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc 33 Entertainment Systems To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use W lt SEEK P gt to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type Press OK to close and return to the main menu To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release lt q SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYT etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass
35. STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If y
36. back as possible 2 Push the head restraint release button and move the head restraint fully down 3 Pull up on the recliner handle located on the outboard side of the seat to fold the front passenger seatback 4 Without releasing the handle push the seatback forward 5 Move the seat as far forward as possible 124 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjusting the front power seat if equipped A WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving T WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop A WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take
37. be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 lb 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 lb No you do not have en
38. between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat It may be beneficial to turn the AdvanceTrac with RSC system off so the wheels are allowed to spin REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Reverse Sensing System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects 231 Driving WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the RSS WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to pr
39. cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products 79 Driver Controls SPEED CONTROL With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Using speed control The speed controls are located on the steering wheel The following buttons work with speed control RESUME Press to resume a set speed SET Press to increase the set speed SET Press to decrease the set speed OFF ON Press to turn speed control off or on Setting speed conirol To set speed control 1 Press and release ON 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press and release SET or SET 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator O light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill e If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed e If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage 80 Driver Controls Disengaging speed control Press the brake pedal to disengage the speed control Disengaging the speed control wi
40. combination lap shoulder belt adjusts to your movement However if you brake hard turn hard or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph 8 km h or more the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement Energy management feature front outboard e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user s chest 137 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt and retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of injury in a collision All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first two types of locking modes and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have three types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help re
41. czscscsccnsssdcecoesdsenscametacns 79 programmable memory 110 side view mirrors power 79 Moon TOOf nee 83 Motorcraft parts 0 279 311 N Navigation system cceeees 55 0 Octane rating 0 eee 299 Oil see Engine oil 0 0 285 OVETONIV GS dassies hc 229 P Parking brake 1 0 0 221 Parts see Motorcraft parts 311 Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor 00 134 Power distribution box see FUSES o eccecccccsessseeeeesteees 248 Power door locks ccceee 102 Power liftgate srece 95 Power MITTOPS seiersen 79 Power PoMtrarsetere irnn 75 Power steering seese 227 fluid checking and adding 307 fluid refill capacity 0 312 fluid specifications 0 0 312 Power Windows ccccceeeees 76 R Radio euretara 27 31 39 Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for CHMAK ON oi 25 dc0 csocdesd ennea 165 RGEIAVS sarren e ees 244 Remote entry system 106 108 illuminated entry 111 113 locking unlocking doors 108 opening the trunk 109 PANIC AAT oassceccisesrcssdvescsvedents 109 replacement additional TVANSMUCTELS 2 eeeeeeeeeeeees 111 replacing the batteries 110 Reverse sensing system 231 Roadside assistance 0 242 ROOL PACK senring 100 S Safety belts see Safety restraints cccceee 132 136 140 Safety Canopy cceee 156 159
42. fuse panel then push the bottom part of the cover until it clicks into place Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is secure To reinstall the trim panel align the tabs on the bottom of the panel with the grooves push the panel shut and slide the release lever to the left to secure the panel To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover 245 Roadside Emergencies co e B Sec TA C m a s a s lal e e e el foo foo foo al S fo N IN gt KO N R to a s y i el i fof prof oj IN gt Ld gt D o aa Cs Cs Ci6_ 5 C27 C28 5 The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating 1 Not used Spare High mount brake lamp brake on off ISA SYNC module 4 2 3 Low beam headlamps left Low beam headlamps right 7 Keypad illumination 2nd row seat Brake shift interlock BSI 15A hterior lights Cargo lamps 0 15 Bacighting Puddle lamps 246 A A A A A A A A A A 0 15 15 0 10 0 10 10 15 15 Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating All wheel drive AWD 12 7 5A Power mirror switch Driver side power seat memory Driver seat module keep alive power 17 20A All power lock motor feeds ee eo 2 2 Rear park assist Yaw rate sensor Heated seats Passive anti theft system transceiver
43. grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board 2 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 3 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 4 Snap the battery cover back onto the key Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The IKT should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional IKTs you can either reprogram them yourself or take all IKTs to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself refer to Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section of this chapter Note At least two IKTs are required to perform this procedure yourself lIluminated entry The interior lamps and puddle lamps if equipped illuminate when the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is used to unlock the door s 111 Locks and Security The illumina
44. holders Rotate the armrest rearward until the armrest is in the latched position The armrest will click when it is latched into position SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp e Front crash severity sensors e Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors e Restraint system warning light and back up tone 132 Seating and Safety Restraints e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the
45. is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event SOS Post Crash Alert System The SOS Post Crash Alert automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The SOS Post Crash Alert can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is
46. is equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack AIJ The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way QS to connect your portable music S Q player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played i ean through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation system supplement Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 47 Entertainment Systems 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeat
47. keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter portion of the IKT to your vehicle Note A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight can be IKTs with remote entry functionality 117 Locks and Security Tips e Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs or standard SecuriLock keys e You must have two previously programmed coded keys keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible e If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously O 4 programmed coded key into the ignition 2 Turn the i
48. new battery installed the strategy must be relearned Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6 speed automatic transmission P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 229 Driving R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six D Drive with Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist Pressing the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever activates two features at the same time Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist 1 Overdrive Cancel e Overdrive is deactivated e The transmission operates in gears one through five The O D OFF lamp in the 0 D ins
49. oa Trailer tow parking amps Po Nosed pa a tow parking lamp relay Peo sed Pg Not used Paso sed s 40a ABS pump motor 249 Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Description Po 9 CC Fuel pumpdiode O 20 Powertrain control module PCM relay a j Trailer tow left stoprturn lamp relay 23 __ One touch integrated start diode 25 Rear seat release relay e Peel pump relay o __ Heated mirror relay Not sed P36 Not sed SS o tte relay s __ __ Rear window defroster relay o Noted OOOO a Starter relay e Backup lamp relay PO a OS 250 Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Description P47 CC Trailer tow right stop turn lamp relay_ P48 Rust relay o PL CC Noted sd 53 30A Passenger compartment fuse panel run start Not sed SS p65 Not sed e A tute ode Front wipers eo soa Driver power seatimemory module Pe Not sed ee 200 Cigar lignter Power point Per idiot sed e o Fuel pump O S S Ce J Moo o _ Not used OOOO S S eNO sed O o 251 Roadside Emergencies CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system TPMS the indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functio
50. off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor 125 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket Gf equipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Gf equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Refer to Front passenger sensing system section for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Press the switch in the direction of the arrows to move the seat forward backward up or down Tilt function Move the switch in the direction of the arrows to tilt the seat forward or a lt backward v C v Memory seats and power mirrors if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat and power mirrors to two programmable Ly ef positions The memory seat control is located on the driver door e To program position 1 move the driver seat and mirrors to the desired position using the assoc
51. on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 mode If a CD is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display 17 amp CD eject Press to eject a CD d 18 CD slot Insert a CD label side up in the CD slot 38 Entertainment Systems Premium sound AM FM in dash six CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped 7 ese Gg 14 VOL PUSH lt SEEK et SEEK REW FF FOLDER SHUFFLE 7 Loen Fougene SHER T Paor 00000 WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches radio and moon roof if equipped may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 1 A AA Tune Disc selector In radio mode press to manually go up A or down Vv the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies In menu mode use to select various settings In CD MP
52. on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury 207 Tires Wheels and Loading Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will
53. playing For an in dash six CD system if a disc is not already loaded press LOAD Select a slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within five seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to six discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the last loaded disc will begin to play Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this chapter for further information 3 In CD MP3 mode you can access the following features Press lt Q SEEK SEEK P gt to access the previous next tracks Gseex Press and hold REW to manually reverse in a CD MP38 track Press and hold FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track While in folder mode press A FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available While in folder mode press FOLDER gt to access the next folder on MP3 discs if available 29 Entertainment Systems Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display
54. playing song s title in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 song titles If you attempt to save more than 20 titles the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved titles and press A IV to cycle through the saved titles When the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display 40 Entertainment Systems e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A V to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all songs from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will re
55. rear seating positions than in the front WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front passenger airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag The system is designed to help protect small child size occupants from frontal airbag deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to proper child seating or restraint usage recommendations Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty and the safety belt is unbuckled Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage 134 Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the fron
56. s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note If the two stage unlocking feature is disabled all doors will unlock for more information regarding two stage unlocking refer to the Unlocking the doors Two stage unlock section earlier in this chapter To unlock all doors enter the factory set code or your personal code then press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press and hold the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time with the driver s door closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition 115 Locks and Security Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how
57. taken when operating on rough roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and tire damage Introduction DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information Event Data Recording Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were ope
58. the ignition must be in the on position and e the headlamp control must be in the off autolamps or parking lamps position 63 Lights WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parking lamp 4 n operation mn mm Move the control to the full upright position past detent to turn on the 4 mm interior lamps Certain displays like the message center and the climate control unit do not change with the dimmer control till the dash mounted sensor senses full night conditions Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full Dome ON position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer Vertical aim adjustment 1 Park the
59. the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8a second time 5 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled 105 Locks and Security CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS e When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and Clay must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock E G A for both doors e Insert the key and turn to the A A lock position key horizontal to engage the childproof locks e Insert the key and turn to the unlock position key vertical to disengage the childproof locks REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This devic
60. the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the locator symbols on the seat back Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with y LATCH attachments 7 Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions center seating use The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 460 mm 18 inches apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on b
61. the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve lock release button e and a guide sleeve with a pin hole for removing the head restraint 4 120 Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint 4 oS 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve lock release button and pushing down on the head restraint l l y gt IN Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied 121 Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment 4 position 2 Insert and push a tool such as a large paper clip into the pin hole located on the side of the guide sleeve and press the lock release button then pull the head restraint upward To reinstall the a
62. to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster e When the ignition is in the off A position the indicator will flash once every two seconds to R indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position If this occurs
63. to your vehicle Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the O O O garage door You may need to hold the button from 5 20 seconds during which time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves When the button is released the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete 4 Press and release the button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful If your garage door does not operate repeat the previous steps in this section After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home lighting repeat Steps 1 through 4 substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener For example you could assign the left most button to the garage door the center button to a security device and the right most button to another garage door opener 91 Driver Controls Note The Car2U system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it
64. tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly and the rear wheels on the ground This will cause damage to your AWD system If you are using a vehicle transport trailer follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider Note If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground follow these instructions Tow only in the forward direction Release the parking brake Place the transmission shift lever in N Neutral Place the ignition in the accessory position refer to Starting in the Driving chapter Do not exceed 65 mph 105 km h Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and at each fuel stop 214 Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Off locks the automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal This position also shuts the engine and all La electrical accessories off without locking the steering wheel To lock the steering wheel remove the key then turn the steering wheel 2 Accessory allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running This position also unlocks the steering wheel 3 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powe
65. vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away 64 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other 4 There is a distinct cut off change from light to dark in the left portion of the beam pattern The top edge of this cut off should be positioned two inches 50 8 mm below the horizontal reference line 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise to adjust down or counterclockwise to adjust up The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 6 Close the hood and turn off the lamps HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE 65 Lights TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 42 e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal INTERIOR LAMPS Front row map lamps if equipped
66. 101 U S A Telephone 813 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 271 Customer Assistance REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway T
67. 11 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol 171 Seating and Safety Restraints The LATCH anchors are located at
68. 270 D Daytime running lamps See Lamps sessissokoseijoii iyaa 63 Dipstick automatic transmission EAI eera aT 308 Engine Oil spisser testoid 285 Driving under special conditions n 231 236 239 SAM erate eae EES 287 Snow and ICE asssisssseisssseeeeen 239 through water a se 238 241 E Electronic message center 19 20 Emergencies roadside Jump starting oo eeeeeee 258 Emission control system 304 BENSIN sorsien 315 Cleaning creeranno en 275 COOLANT Aree a ee 290 fail safe cooling e 294 idle speed control 0008 288 lubrication specifications 312 refill capacities 0 00 ee 312 service points seses 282 283 starting after a collision 244 Engine block heater 218 Engine Oil eeeeseeeseeeereeeees 285 change oil soon warning message center ecce 285 checking and adding 285 GIDSTICK sropunirornessnsiir iosu 285 filter specifications 287 311 recommendations ccce 287 refill capacities sireriserirsiniss 312 Specifications cceceseeeees 312 Event data recording 0 7 Exhaust fumes arresero 218 F Fail safe cooling ou 294 Fluid capacities c eee 312 Fog lamis srecno eae 63 Four Wheel Drive vehicles driving off road ee 235 PUG mearen 295 calculating fuel ECONOMY vssvnsvevvaczatandexeves cts 23 301 GAP geese dace cescete E A E EA 298 CADAGCILY a erae eran 312
69. 3 mode press to select the desired disc 39 Entertainment Systems In satellite radio mode if equipped press A y to tune to the next previous channel In CATEGORY MODE press W to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Refer to Category Mode under Menu for further information Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to access SYNC PHONE features For further information please refer to the SYNC supplement If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display will read NO PHONE 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access the following settings SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently
70. 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 168 Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 169 Seating and Safety Restraints 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion o
71. 6 420 KPA 60 PSI P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET A LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL xX NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL ane TRE yp aume DIMENSIONS FRONT LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI LT225 75A 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI DE 7145 80016 420 KPA 60 PSI COU P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 204 FRONT REAR x ARRI RE X The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer AVANT SEE OWNERS MANUAL XXX Ibs XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXKXXKXXXXXX Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the
72. 97 202 209 213 215 215 220 222 229 231 242 242 243 244 244 252 257 258 264 Table of Contents Customer Assistance 266 Reporting safety defects U S only 272 Reporting safety defects Canada only 272 Cleaning 273 Maintenance and Specifications 280 Engine compartment 282 Engine oil 285 Battery 288 Engine coolant 290 Fuel information 295 Air filter s 309 Part numbers 311 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 312 Engine data 315 Accessories 318 Ford Extended Service Plan 320 Index 323 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2009 Ford Motor Company Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e In Australia www ford com au e In Mexico www ford com mx Additional owner information is given
73. As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and PTU Power Transfer Unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly 238 Driving Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what cond
74. CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information CDs with homemade paper Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder TOO1 track to F253 T255 e Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 51 Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you creat
75. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position 136 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming r from until you hear a snap and feel 74 A C it latch Make sure the tongue is ie securely fastened in the buckle Na pD 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle N All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts While you are fastened in the safety belt the
76. ED Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features These include 1 Cupholders 2 Tissue box holder located on underside of console lid 3 Rear power point 4 Utility compartment with a clamshell tray with coin holder and a removable divider for organizing and storing personal items including a laptop computer MP3 players CDs or handbags and if equipped an ambient light control switch located on the front of the compartment WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations e In the instrument panel e In the center console utility compartment e On the rear side of the center console accessible from the rear seats e On the left rear quarter panel accessible from the liftgate or behind the rear seat Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may h
77. G Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Listening to the radio 1 If the audio system is off press VOL PUSH VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press AM FM repeatedly to choose between AM FM1 FM2 frequency bands 3 Press A IV to manually go up down the frequency band Press lt SEEK gt to search down up the chosen frequency band for the next strongest station To disengage SEEK mode press A IV oie nici Sra ae desired station press and hold a memory preset 1 6 to save the station PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will return signifying the station has been saved You can save up to six stations in each frequency band six in AM six in FM1 and six in FM2 To access your saved stations press the corresponding memory preset The memory preset and the station frequency will appear on the display 27 Entertainment Systems Listening to satellite radio if equipped 1 If the audio system is turned off VOL PUSH press VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL P
78. If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder Press B gt 11_ play pause when a CD MP3 is playing to pause the disc CD PAUSE will appear in the display Press again to resume play 4 For a single CD system press 4 to eject the current disc i The display will read CD EJECT O For an in dash six CD system press amp and then select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc To auto eject up to six discs press and hold A until the system begins ejecting all loaded discs If the discs are not removed the system will reload the discs 30 Entertainment Systems AM FM Single CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped mrs IZ cD a AM AUX o a o a i sexx EEE sesx REW FF lt FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE P il aK 1 2 3 4 5 6 WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly re
79. Introduction Instrument Cluster Warning lights and chimes Gauges Message center Entertainment Systems How to get going AM FM stereo with CD AM FM stereo with in dash six CD Auxiliary input jack Line in USB port Satellite radio information Navigation system SYNC Climate Controls Manual heating and air conditioning Automatic temperature control Rear window defroster Lights Headlamps Turn signal control Bulb replacement Driver Controls Windshield wiper washer control Steering wheel adjustment Power windows Mirrors Speed control 2010 Edge edg Owners Guide own2002 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents 4 12 12 17 19 27 27 31 39 47 49 52 55 55 56 56 58 61 62 62 66 67 72 72 73 76 78 80 Table of Contents Locks and Security Keys Locks Anti theft system Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes AdvanceTrac Transmission operation Reverse sensing system Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher control Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Wheel lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing 101 101 115 120 120 132 147 162 180 182 184 1
80. LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing t
81. NFO repeatedly to cycle through the following features SETUP RESET TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO until the A or B trip appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press and hold RESET until it resets Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English MILES km TO E This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty Press RESET to clear this warning message It will return at approximately 25 miles 40 km 10 miles 16 km and 0 miles 0 km miles to empty 20 Instrument Cluster The distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be dif
82. P WD Fe 23 Instrument Cluster Press RESET to turn autolock on or off AUTOUNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off Press RESET to turn autounlock on or off POWER LIFTGATE if equipped This feature allows users to open close the rear liftgate at the touch of a button Press RESET to turn the power liftgate on or off EASY ENTRY if equipped This feature automatically moves the driver s seat backwards for easy exit entry from the vehicle Press RESET to turn the easy entry exit seat on or off REAR PARK AID if equipped This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected Press RESET to turn the rear park assist on or off ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH RESET FOR NEW Allows you to choose in which language the message center will display Press RESET to cycle through each of the language choices Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages
83. RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer k L GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 205 Tires Wheels and Loading e Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXXXX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX KPa XX PSLCOLD 4f ATXXX KPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLECONEORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PAT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK INTTR TP PS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX MFD BY F BY FORD D MOTOR 0 DATE xx xx Psi ncn els en tay PUBER Bf o0xk a AVEC TIRES PNEUS RUAS JANTES XXxXXX AT AkPa PSI LPC xxx xx COLD A FROID yore VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX AUMELEES TYPE XXX XXXX COMPLIES 000 00 gt 00 AXX JIL A ll ie TPS TR T AXLE Te SPR XX X XOX ar 7 oodd XXX TOOAXOONXXX XX
84. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 11 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load ra
85. Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is restarted 24 Instrument Cluster e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver s door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger side door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the brake system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the br
86. USH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press AUX repeatedly to cycle through auxiliary audio sources ax Select SAT1 SAT2 or SATS to listen to satellite radio 3 Press lt Q SEEK SEEK P to access the previous or next satellite Gseex seexe channel You may also seek by music category For further information refer to CATEGORY listing under the MENU control on your specific audio system 4 Once you are tuned to the desired channel press and hold a memory preset 1 6 to save the channel PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will return signifying the station has been saved You can save up to six channels in each six in SAT1 six in SAT2 and six in SATS To access your saved channels press the corresponding memory preset The memory preset and the channel name will appear on the display Listening to a CD MP3 if equipped 1 If the audio system is turned off VOL PUSH press VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press CD to enter CD mode If a disc is already loaded into the system CD play will begin where it ended last 28 Entertainment Systems For a single CD system if a disc is not already loaded insert only one label side up into the CD slot LOADING CD and READING DISC will appear in the display The first track on the disc will begin
87. Vista Roof press and release the ais control The panoramic Vista Roof will open to the comfort position Press and release the control again to fully open To stop the one touch open feature press the control again Note The comfort position helps to alleviate rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened To close the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshades Pull the as control down and release The glass panel will stop at the express close position Firmly pull the control again and hold to fully close the Vista Roof Pull the control down and release to close the sunshades to the express close position Firmly pull the control again and hold to fully close the front and rear sunshades To vent the panoramic Vista Roof From the closed position press and release the TILT control i To close pull and hold the TILT control down Note If the panoramic Vista Roof is excessively operated the glass and shade motors will automatically go into a fail safe jog mode manual intermittent operation to prevent overheating and or damage to the motor The motors will revert back to normal operation after a period of idle time UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s universal garage door opener will vary according to your option package Before programing make sure your transmitter matches the graphi
88. WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 206 Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Cmportant The towing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified
89. Z6TOGW ISM y Teog onoyusg TgE 9 seouno gT MY PME ALA TUA Jojsue I MO TO 0PTMSL AX AETS eN MUN I JSULAL I MOd uoneIyn ds pIo 314 Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine 3 5 L DOHC V6 engine Required fuel 87 octane Firing order 1 4 2 5 3 6 Spark plug gap 0 050 0 057 inch 1 29 1 45 mm Ignition system Coil on plug Compression ratio Engine drivebelt routing 1 Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine 2 Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine 315 Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO that a Safety Compliance DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLBI XXXXXKG Certification Label be affixed to a e SH XOOOKE a WITH vehicle and prescribe where the r 7 ey Ae Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX KPAXX PSLGOLD _ AT XXX KPaIXX PSI COLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR Compliance Certification Label is EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar VI 2000000000000000 ooa by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s UT ON TT OM DU EIT door EXT PNT _ XX RCXX DSO WBTBRK INTTR TPPS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X xX X XO XX XKX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX Ve
90. a new vehicle e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing drive no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer e To eliminate excessive shifting use a lower gear This will also assist in transmission cooling For additional information refer to Awtomatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter e Anticipate stops and brake gradually e Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for more information Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles 212 Tires Wheels and Loading e If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached e The trailer tongue weight should be 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight e After you
91. a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 188 Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating
92. a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir 292 Maintenance and Specifications If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low leve
93. abin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation engages automatically with selection of MAX A C or can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 4 9 Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 56 Climate Controls 5 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in MAX A C Q defrost and A floor defrost 6 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the GV defrost or Y floor defrost position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in the O OFF position or with A recirculated air engaged and A C off e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minut
94. activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence e using a keypad procedure if equipped or e or by using the instrument cluster message center Gf equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature 104 Locks and Security Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on 1 position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to
95. ad NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is displayed Use A V to manually increase decrease Press MENU again to disengage clock mode Press OK to close and return to the main menu AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A IV to turn on off Press OK to close and return to the main menu When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets 41 Entertainment Systems RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY
96. adiness light and tone e and the electrical wiring which connects the components e Side curtain airbag system Refer to Safety Canopy system later in this chapter e Front passenger sensing system Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate The front passenger sensing system will disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat
97. ake Traction Control features will continue to function however ESC and RSC are disabled AdvanceTrac with RSC Features BA idi Engine Brake AN K a RSC ESC Traction Traction Control Control Default at ies start up during Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled bulb check Disabled Disabled Disabled Button i Illuminated below pressed Enabled solid 38 mph momentarily 60 kp h 60 kp h 60 kp h Button pressed Not i Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled again after illuminated deactivation 226 Driving STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power steering fluid level Check for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders o
98. ake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter LIFTGATE AJAR Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 25 Instrument Cluster TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK COMPASS MOD if equipped Displayed when the compass is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM Displayed when an attempt is made to program a fifth Integrated Key to the Remote Key Entry System For more information on Integrated Key refer to Locks and Security chapter in this manual 26 Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS Quick start How to get going WARNIN
99. al information Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 12 Instrument Cluster WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Powertrain malfunction reduced power I lluminates when a A powertrain or a AWD fault has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Ch
100. aler If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 242 Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits In Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you n
101. area of the driver s side hood e Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 319 Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask you dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage includ
102. arming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 lb 180 kg of weight carried Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal Close windows for high speed driving 303 Maintenance and Spec
103. at are in the front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below Small i e three ring Unlit ace binder small purse bottled water Medium i e heavy Disabled briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Lit Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console Cif equipped Objects hanging off the seat back Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket Gf equipped Objects placed on the occupant s lap Cargo interference with the seat Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above 154 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the f
104. at has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 177 Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The impo
105. ave blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses 75 Driver Controls To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent ao he and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close Rear Window Buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise This noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately 2 3 inches 5 8 cm One touch up or down driver s window only Thi
106. booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 lb 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster 175 Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of t
107. c in the procedure 84 Driver Controls HomeLink Car2U Home Automation System HomeLink Wireless Control System if equipped The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to A replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in CO device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting WARNING When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 85 Driver Controls Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purpose
108. capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder or luggage racks Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off highway usage 240 Driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmi
109. cedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices being used Driver Controls To erase programming on the Car2U system individual buttons cannot be erased use the following procedure 1 Firmly press the two outside Car2U system buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights begin to blink rapidly The indicator lights are located directly above the buttons NZ 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release your fingers from the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U system it is recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance The Car2U system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes and modifications to the Car2U system transmitter by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the equipment MANUAL LIFTGATE IF EQUIPPED The liftgate area is only intended for cargo not passengers To open the liftgate press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate then pull on the outside handle e Exercise care when openi
110. choosing the right fuel 299 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates 304 detergent in fuel 0 300 filling your vehicle with fuel sirsie 295 298 301 filter specifications 295 311 fuel pump shut off switch 244 improving fuel economy 301 octane rating 0 ee 299 315 GUAINGY re uisa ik 300 running out of fuel 300 safety information relating to automotive fuels 295 FUSES eeppinen 244 245 G Garage door Opener c00 84 Gas cap see Fuel cap 298 Gas mileage see Fuel ECONOMY eeren 301 GaUBeS sc vesusesvsernemacetenin es 17 H Hazard flashers cccccceeeeees 243 Head restraints sssensone0eee0o 129 Headlamps sirirasissnriisciroijinas 62 AINE ois EEE 64 autolamp system ccccceeeeees 62 bulb specifications 0 000 68 daytime running lights 63 flash tO pass ceccceceesseeeeesteeees 63 high DEAN 3 ces sctiess ces mesere 63 replacing bulbs 0 0 69 turning on and off 62 Heating heating and air conditioning SYSTEM ccasivetsnssacantasscsdereseiass 56 58 Homelink wireless control SVSUCIN E E E 85 HOO ieren e e 281 How to get going ou eee 27 I ISMItiOT perenes 215 315 Illuminated visor mirror 74 Infant seats see Safety seats 167 Inspection maintenance I M TESNE cian deeavnacheteuesceverdanes Coxe 306 Index CLEANING cernis te
111. commended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 198 Tires Wheels and Loading Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section 199 Tires Wheels and Loading When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the Tire Pre
112. commends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches radio and moon roof if equipped may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened LA IV Tuner Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency Also use in menu mode to select various settings 31 Entertainment Systems In satellite radio mode if equipped press A y to tune to the next previous channel In CATEGORY MODE press W to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Refer to Category Mode under Menu for further information Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to access SYNC PHONE features Refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC chapter in the Navigation supplement for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display will read NO PHONE 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access the following settings
113. condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp 67 Lights e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Function Number of bulbs number Headlamp high beam 9005 Headlamp low beam F
114. craft part numbers in this chapter 309 Maintenance and Specifications WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Changing the air filter element 1 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing from the air filter housing 3 Remove the air filter element fe 2 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be sure that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air cleaner housing Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 310 Maintenance and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS lFor spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark
115. ct the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty For AWD vehicles a spare tire of a different size other that the tire provided should never be used A dissimilar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sized between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD vehicles Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Crossover vehicles can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces As a result of the above dimensional differences crossover vehicles often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle dif
116. ctivating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features must be disabled enabled separately Both cannot be disable enabled during the same key cycle 145 Seating and Safety Restraints The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The ignition is off e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the on position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately 1 2 minutes e Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the
117. d by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon Cc indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not
118. d out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pr
119. d water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir
120. d with an obstacle detection feature If the power liftgate is closing the system will reverse to full open when it detects an obstacle A chime will sound three times when an obstacle is detected as the liftgate begins to reopen Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can be closed under power If the power liftgate is opening the system will stop and a chime will sound three times when an obstacle is detected Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can again be operated normally Resetting the power liftgate The power liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if any of these conditions occur e alow voltage or dead battery e disconnected battery e the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar Cunlatched To reset the power liftgate 1 Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then reconnect the battery 2 Manually close and fully latch the liftgate 3 Power open the liftgate by using the integrated keyhead transmitter or the instrument panel control button Note If the power liftgate system is turned off in the message center the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The system will need to be turned on to resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The power liftgate is still operational through the use of the remote entry transmitter and instrument panel button when the power liftgate is turned off in the me
121. dentification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 141 Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to d
122. deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions and in rollovers and side collisions when the Safety Canopy is activated Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section in this chapter
123. dial tubeless etc 194 Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual 1b kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 195 Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended f
124. discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the disc in preset 1 will begin to play Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this chapter for further information 18 amp CD eject To eject a disc from the system press amp Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc When only one CD is loaded press the eject control only The system will eject the only disc and will read REMOVE CD 46 d Entertainment Systems To auto eject up to 6 CDs press and hold 4 until the system begins ejecting all loaded discs If the discs are not removed the system will reload the discs 19 CD slot When prompted by the system insert a CD label side up Auxiliary input jack Line in WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle
125. djustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks l ae Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position 122 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly Using the manual lumbar support if equipped The lumbar control is located on the side of the seat cushion Rachet the lever up or down to adjust lumbar support p WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving Adjusting the front manual seat if equipped WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips Lift handle to move seat forward or backward 123 Seating and Safety Restraints Pump the handle upwards to raise the cushion and pump downward to lower the cushion to the desired location Pull lever up to adjust seatback Folding down the front passenger seatback if equipped The front passenger seatback can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for a long load To fold the seatback 1 Move the seat as far
126. dle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon Cc indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately 304 Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This syst
127. duce forward movement of the driver and passengers Webbing extraction sensitive mode The webbing sensitive locking mode locks the webbing and prevents more belt from being pulled out if the belt is pulled out too quickly The belt will unlock when you stop pulling on it Automatic locking mode How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 138 Seating and Safety Restraints e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode When to use the automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter How to disengage the automatic locking mode WARNING Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision
128. e While various 7 4 mp3 O files may be present files with L mp3 extensions other than mp3 only a files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored y mp3 3 by the system This enables you to mp3 use the same MP3 disc for a variety Ts sis of tasks on your work computer J1 mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system V77 2 mp3 L_FJ mp3 F F 2 doc 5 ppt xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio rece
129. e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget 321 Ford Extended Service Plan IWA A diz SLVLS ALIO ON LdV ssayqqv LNIdd SSV31d SWVN 66 8908r IIN 4eO IeAoy ZZ08 XOg O d ds3 p104 0 SIU iew pue mojaq uonewoju BU 349 dwo9 aow urea oL idSJ P404 1M pulpy Jo 3923d aujnuay jay 322 A Accessory delay ccccccccccceeseees 78 Advance Trac o ccccccceccesseeeeeeteees 222 Air cleaner filter 309 311 Air conditioning 0 0 58 Airbag supplemental restraint SYSTE sapasira 147 156 159 and child safety seats 149 description 147 156 159 GISPOSAl s ss 2esccsivessesasiessasesvenedeias 162 driver airbag 149 157 160 indicator light 156 158 161 operation wee 149 157 160 passenger airbag 149 157 160 Side airbag 0 0 cece 156 All Wheel Drive AWD driving off TOA an c ccsecgesieeccnces 235 Ambient mood lighting 66 Antifreeze see Engine COOLANT eeaeee EE 290 Anti lock brake system see Brakes J sisscissarescetsnctescness 220 Anti theft system 000000000000 115 Audio system see Radio uo 27 31 39 Automatic transmission driving an automatic OVETONIVE 262 c2sccgsctsiedenteeneicenees 229 fluid adding sarena 308
130. e Stay within your vehicle s load limits e Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing Refer to Preparing to tow in this chapter e Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing Refer to Driving while you tow in this chapter e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer Refer to the severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide e Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km e Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications 209 Tires Wheels and Loading Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance Certification label For load specification terms found on the label refer to Vehicle loading with and without a trailer in this chapter Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight FWD GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weight Maximum Trailer weight Tongue load lb GCWR Ib kg range lb kg kg 0 Maximum 0 Maximum 3 5L Class I 7250 8289 0 2000 0 907 0 200 0 91 towing standard 3 5L Class II 8420 8819 0 3500 0 1588 0 350 0 159 towing optional AWD GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weight Maximum Trailer weight Tongue load lb GCWR lb kg range lb kg kg 0 Maximum 0 Maximum 3 5L Class I 7450 8379 0 2000 0 907 0 200 0 91 towing standard 3
131. e by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 268 Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
132. e designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service Le If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore d
133. e easy entry feature is enabled 109 Locks and Security Activating the memory feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat and mirrors to the desired positions 2 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver s door for five seconds A tone will be heard after Ly ef 114 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 3 Within three seconds press the control on the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter 4 A tone will be heard when the activation is complete 5 Repeat this procedure for another Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if desired Deactivating the memory feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver s door for five seconds A tone will be heard after 142 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 2 Within three seconds press the control on the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter 3 A tone will be heard when the deactivation is complete 4 Repeat this procedure for another Integrated Keyhead Transmitter if desired Replacing the battery The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent 110 Locks and Security To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin in the slot of the IKT near the key ring in order to remove the battery cover Note Do not wipe off any
134. e engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until it stops To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee LSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this chapter for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information 287 Maintenance and Specifications Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters ar
135. e for road and wind noise Use A IV to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting 42 Entertainment Systems Track Folder mode Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In track mode press lt q SEEK SEEK gt to scroll through all tracks on the disc In folder mode press lt q SEEK SEEK p gt to scroll through tracks within the selected folder Press lt Q FOLDER FOLDER P gt to access the previous next folder if available Press OK to close and return to the main menu COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use W to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level Press OK to close and return to the main menu ALL SEATS Occupancy mode Use amp IV to select and optimize sound for ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS Press OK to close and return to the main menu SINGLE PLAY DUAL PLAY if equipped If SINGLE PLAY is ON press A IV for DUAL PLAY For further informa
136. e ignition is in the on position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h 102 Locks and Security Deactivating activating autolock feature Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock procedure e using a keypad procedure if equipped or e or by using the instrument cluster message center Gf equipped Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 T
137. e liftgate area before using power liftgate control In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate press the control twice If the liftgate stops mid travel it may have detected an obstacle Check to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the power assist by manually closing the liftgate Normal operation can then be resumed WARNING Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle Car finder Press A twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm The horn will sound and the turn lamps will flash for a maximum of three minutes Press again or turn the ignition to the on position to deactivate or wait for the alarm to time out in three minutes Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off position Memory seat feature if equipped The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter allows you to recall the memory seat mirror feature Press a to automatically move the seat mirrors to the desired memory position Note The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the ignition and th
138. e may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 106 Locks and Security There are two possible types of IKTs e Vehicles equipped with a power liftgate OS wy D e Vehicles not equipped with a power liftgate The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle 107 Locks and Security The IKT allows you to e remotely unlock the vehicle doors e remotely lock all the vehicle doors e remotely open the power liftgate Gif equipped e activate the personal alarm e operate the illuminated entry feature The remote entry lock unlock feature operates in any ignition position except while the key is held in the start position The panic feature operates with the key in the off position If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Unlocking the doors two stage unlock 1 Press and release to unlock
139. e the front tires spin in deep sand turn off the vehicle and allow the AWD system to cool down for a minimum of 15 minutes After the system has cooled down normal AWD function will return When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use L Low gear when possible L Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine 237 Driving Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud
140. eage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns Avoid potholes and objects on the road Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking 189 Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to you
141. eck fuel cap Illuminates when the fuel cap may not be properly installed Continued driving with this light on may cause the service engine soon warning light to come on refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specification chapter Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning C P light is functional it will neice illuminate when the B RAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible wr WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury 13 Instrument Cluster Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash a malfunction has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Normal braking is still functional unless the b
142. ecked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on or begins to flash contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Low fuel if equipped Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty Refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged O D OFF Illuminates when the 0 D overdrive function of the transmission has been turned off OFF refer to the Driving chapter If the light flashes steadily or does not illuminate contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Anti theft system Flashes when AN the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft System has been activated R Door ajar Illuminates when the ignition is in the on position and any door is open ED 15 Instrument Cluster Low washer fluid if equipped Kain Illuminates when the windshield Tatal washer fluid is low lt Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on If the indicators flash faster check for a burned out bulb High beams Illuminates when the high beam headla
143. edly until LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player s
144. ee 165 Index Child safety seats booster SOUS a e ceausiiecesectest 176 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 275 instrument panel 008 277 IMIULETIOL vs yssecuccaavesbiigsiceeccteeiietevse 278 PLASTIC parts sxscdesssecsscssseccsves ests 275 safety Belts ccicssscredesenctmenwcciaes 278 Washing seccion ECER 273 WAKING xsccsressstscasaaeacsactveneucenaes 274 WEES visas rerea aI 274 wiper blades cceceseeceeeees 276 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 58 Clock adjust 6 CD in dash cceceeeeeeeeee 41 AMEM CD rrena 33 Compass electronic set zone adjustment 0 23 CONSOLE enaren 75 overhead ececeeceeecesteeeeeeteeeeeee 74 Controls POWEY SEAT oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 125 steering Column eeee 82 Convertible cleaning eierne aniei 276 Coolant checking and adding 290 refill capacities 0 0 0 0 293 312 Specifications occ eeees 312 Cruise control see Speed COMUTOL iesirea nani 80 Cupholder s ccccccccesseceeenes 131 Customer Assistance 242 Ford Extended Service PLANT anonsuna aoai 320 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada sssrssurismisis 270 324 Getting roadside assistance 242 Getting the service you need ou eeceeecesseseeeeseeseeeenes 266 Ordering additional owner s literature oo cceesccseesseeeeeeeees 271 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration PrOBYaTA siesena
145. eed to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel by the radio The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery 243 Roadside Emergencies FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt After an accident if the engine cranks but does not start this switch may have been activated This switch is located behind a panel on the left side of the cargo area To reset the switch 1 Turn the ignition to off 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no leaks are apparent reset the switch by pressing in on the reset button 4 Turn the ignition to o
146. els If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 191 Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect
147. elt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor 172 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining safety bel
148. em TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 197 TIVES eiiean 182 183 252 ALSNIMENC asscizscsevetesdszesticeanaery 190 CAT 0 ogre occ asses seeseeceenes 186 changing e 252 254 255 checking the pressure 186 inflating ep teses 184 NAIBEL E A EEE 196 replacing erinran T a 188 TOANE irasagar adria 190 safety practices ceeeeeeee 189 sidewall information 191 snow tires and chains 202 Spare URE seat ogi 252 254 terminology scissa 183 tre grades orgcrnrerseniccre 183 tread Wear gncenickmirns 182 187 TOWING sionerien ena 209 recreational towing 00 213 trailer tOWING sspirserosorireerer 209 328 We CKEY oo cececcecccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 264 Transmission s es 229 brake shift interlock BSI 227 fluid checking and adding automatis eee cece 308 fluid refill capacities 312 lubricant specifications 312 Turn signal wo eee eects eeeeee 66 U Universal garage door opener 84 USB POLE sisssadstidesessssaisniosisiiack aces 49 Vv Vehicle Identification Number CVI anaana 316 Vehicle loading sisccceenssscayser dee reeae 202 Ventilating your vehicle 218 WwW Warning lights see Lights 12 Washer fluid sssrisrirnoneena 283 Water Driving through 241 Windows POWET mor a EE 76 rear wiper washef usses 73 Windshield washer fluid and WIADELS soesoenan iea nRa 72 checking and adding fluid
149. em is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon ie indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon C4 indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fwel filler cap in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon Cc indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions 305 Maintenance and Specifications detecte
150. engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The service engine soon C symbol will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled 294
151. engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e Do not mix coolants Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter 291 Maintenance and Specifications Note Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distille
152. ental effects 273 Cleaning WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body ow gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on yo
153. er for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR P265 40R22 LOW PROFILE TIRES AND WHEELS If your vehicle is equipped with P265 40R22 tires they are low profile tires These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport appearance With low profile tires you may notice an increase in road noise and faster tire wear depending on road conditions and driving styles Due to their design low profile tires and wheels are more prone to road damage from potholes rough or unpaved roads car wash rails and curb contact than standard tires and wheels Your vehicle s warranty does not cover these types of damage Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation pressures and extra caution should be
154. er vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging To exit defrost select another distribution mode 2 Passenger side temperature control Press to increase decrease the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle Allows the passenger to choose and control a different temperature than the driver if desired 3 G Rear defroster Press to activate deactive the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 4 DUAL Press to engage disengage separate passenger side temperature control 5 a Passenger heated seat Press to control the passenger heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 58 Climate Controls 6 Recirculated air Press to activate deactive air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation can be engaged manually in any airflow selection except defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in some airflow modes to reduce fog potential 7 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO QQ defrost and GA floor defrost 8 S
155. erson and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Pass Airbag Off Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased 153 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects th
156. es e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth 277 Cleaning INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats and safety belts e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the mate
157. es after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the PARK gear position to continue to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance in MAX A C mode 1 Select MAX A C 2 Move temperature control selector to the coolest setting 3 Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain comfort To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select H 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows 57 Climate Controls DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DATC SYSTEM WITH HEATED SEATS IF EQUIPPED Q AS z Ee EXT E TAAA Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter MAX A C setting In order to achieve maximum cooling performance press A C and set the temperature to 60 F 16 C and the highest blower setting 1 G47 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demist
158. espect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trawler towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Introduction Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapt
159. essure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns 184 Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s rec
160. est that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active ff A airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental restraint system work The safety belt pretensioner and airbag SRS are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates pretensioner activation and airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Front airbags are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration 149 Seating and Safety Restraints The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodi
161. etermine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature 142 Seating and Safety Restraints The driver s and front passenger s safety belts are buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The driver s or front passenger s safety belt is not buckled when the vehicle has reached at least 3 mph 5 km h and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The driver s or front passenger s safety belt becomes unbuckled for approximately one minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 3 mph 5 km h and more than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The Belt Minder feature will not activate The Belt Minder feature is activa
162. ety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire 295 Maintenance and Specifications WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle Always turn off the vehicle before refueling Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolon
163. ew the previous display text In satellite radio mode if equipped press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 45 Entertainment Systems 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn on off Turn to increase decrease volume b Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 mode If a disc is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display 17 LOAD To load a disc into the system press LOAD Select a slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to 6 discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the
164. ewhere other than the correct tether anchor A WARNING Do not use seat anchors as cargo tie downs Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For vehicles with adjustable head restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint If the top of the safety seat hits the adjustable head restraint raise the head restraint to let the child seat fit further rearward 2 Locate the correct anchor behind the gap cover for the selected A A seating position l jla ae E F 174 Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown WARNING If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions WARNING If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use Child booster seats The belt positioning
165. f 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see 144 Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given Consider T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown clear Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s airbag system One time disable If at any time the driver front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the safety belt for that seating position the Belt Minder is disabled for the current ignition cycle The Belt Minder feature will enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds Confirmation is not given for the one time disable Deactivating a
166. f damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 186 Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn EEr down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm aa A When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weat
167. f the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out e a 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 170 Seating and Safety Restraints 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation
168. ferent than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the RESET button press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter AVERAGE MPH km h Displays the vehicle s average speed Press and hold RESET to reset your average speed TIME 1 OR 2 Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time To operate do the following 1 Press and release RESET to start the timer 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET until the timer resets 21 Instrument Cluster COMPASS The compass heading is displayed in the message center display The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass acc
169. ferently than an ordinary passenger car 181 Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart signif
170. ft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 279 Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of ve
171. g system In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 135 Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt precautions f WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained f WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed
172. gate is 6 10 inches 15 24 cm from being latched the liftgate may reverse to the full open position Verify that the gate is closed before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure The liftgate or it components could be damaged in an enclosure if the liftgate is open When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32 F 0 C the liftgate may stop about 5 inches 12 7 cm from the full open position The liftgate can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the maximum open position The power liftgate feature can be enabled or disabled using the message center controls With the setting turned off power operation is disabled from the liftgate handle button and from the rear cargo area button The integrated keyhead transmitter and instrument panel switch will still continue to operate the liftgate regardless of the position state of the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter To power open or close the liftgate from the Instrument panel Press the button located to the left of the steering column once to power open or close the liftgate 96 Driver Controls To power open or close the liftgate with the integrated keyhead transmitter Press amp twice within three seconds to open the liftgate Refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter To power open the liftgate with outside liftgate control button
173. ged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated 296 Maintenance and Specifications clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel contai
174. gnition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the first coded key from the ignition 4 After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position insert the second previously coded key into the ignition 5 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition 8 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least six seconds 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition 118 Locks and Security If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle s engine and will operate the remote entry system if the new key is an Integrated Keyhead Transmitter The theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming If the key was not successfully prog
175. guration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 265 Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to f
176. has been initially programmed it is necessary to erase the current settings using the Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons procedure and then programming all of the devices being used Fixed code programming Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter 1 To program units with fixed code DIP switches you will need the garage door hand held transmitter paper and a pen or pencil 2 Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to right for all 8 to 12 switches Use the figure below When a switch is in the up on or position circle L When a switch is in the middle neutral or 0 position circle M When a switch is in the down off or position circle R 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 i a Switch position 1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ii 12 Middle neutral or0 M M M M M M M M M M MM Down offor TRI RI RIR RIR RIRIRIRIRIR L left M middle R right 92 Driver Controls 3 To input these positions into the Car2U system simultaneously press all three Car2U system buttons for a few seconds and then release to put the device into programming mode The indicator lights will blink slowly Within 2 5 minutes enter your corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into your Car2U system by pressi
177. has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light as used for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned to the on position e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 158 Seating and Safety Restraints Safety Canopy system 4 objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying Safety Canopy Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not place
178. hat lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Car2U system programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed Car2U system buttons should be erased for security reasons Refer to Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons later in this section Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Car2U system Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist you in programming the transmitter Additional Car2U system information can be found on line at www learcar2U com or by calling the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 572 2728 Types of garage door openers rolling code and fixed code The Car2U Home Automation System may be programmed to operate rolling code and fixed code garage door openers e Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are code protected Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every time your remote control garage door opener is used 89 Driver Controls e Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996 Fixed code uses the same coded signal every time It is manually programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code If y
179. have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park automatic transmission or N Neutral manual transmissions e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow your vehicle for personal travel such as behind a motor home or a truck Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle Refer to the Climate Controls chapter for more information In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle please refer to Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles Tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider 213 Tires Wheels and Loading All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles Tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer Do not
180. he vehicle e Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors one on each side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated If the front passenger sensing system detects an empty seat the front passenger seat mounted side airbag will be deactivated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation 157 Seating and Safety Restraints The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the side airbag
181. he 22 inch tire and wheel assembly and then replace the load floor If you are stowing a flat tire place the tire in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is able to protrude through a wheel opening If you are stowing the spare tire place the spare in the spare tire well in its original position 4 Secure the wheel by replacing the washer and the wing nut and turning the wing nut clockwise WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance rotation flat tire wheel removal etc Lug nut socket Wheel lug nut torque size Bolt size Ib ft Lug nut socket size 3 4 100 135 inch 19 mm hex Bolt size 4 x 20 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners 257 Roadside Emergencies WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in mo
182. he vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 lb 86 kg or upward to 100 lb 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 lb 86 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 176 Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats If your backless booster se
183. hen firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tive wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs o
184. hen possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module 147 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the airbag module Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint system SRS or its fuses See your authorized dealer WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle 148 Seating and Safety Restraints Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics sugg
185. her storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 187 Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if
186. her physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury 127 Seating and Safety Restraints Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The heated seats will only function when the ignition is in the on position To operate the heated seats e Press the control located on the ao climate control system panel once to activate high heat e Press twice to activate low heat e Press a third time to deactivate The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated For low heat one light will be lit for high heat both lights will be lit REAR SEATS Head restraints Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head The outboard head restraints can be moved up by pulling up on the head restraint 4 128 Seating and Safety Restraints Press the release butto
187. hicle it will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products 78 Driver Controls EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors Ea WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion To adjust your mirrors p Ix 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place Blind spot mirrors if equipped Your vehicle my be equipped with blind spot mirrors See Blind spot mirrors in the Driving chapter Fold away mirrors Pull the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash Heated outside mirrors Li if equipped Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could
188. hicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 280 Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood latch that is located under the front center of the hood 3 Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod 281 Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT Engine coolant reservoir 1 2 3 4 5 6 Gs 8 9 Power steering fluid reservoir Brake fluid reservoir Battery Power distribution box Air filter assembly Transmission fluid dipstick Engine oil dipstick Engine oil filler cap 10 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 282 Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID lt gt Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise ve streaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities sec
189. hicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number 316 Maintenance and Specifications The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location O 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO i DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Label The follo wing table tells you FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB which transmission each code XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG XXXXIKKXXXXK TIRES XXXXXXXXXXX represents XXXXKX RIMS XXXX XX AT XXX KPa XX PSLCOLD AL XXX KPa xX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK INTTR TPS R AXLE SPR TXXXXX XXX X XX X X CXXX XxX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXN XXXX XXXXXXX XX 6F50 6 speed Automatic Transmission 317 Accessories GENUINE FORD
190. hould not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion 48 Entertainment Systems USB port if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with a USB port inside your center console This feature allows you to plug in SS media playing devices memory sticks and also to charge devices if LK they support this feature For further information on this feature refer to Accessing and using your USB port in the SYNC supplement or Navigation System supplement GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There a
191. iated controls Press and hold control button 1 for at least two seconds 126 Seating and Safety Restraints e To program position 2 repeat the previous procedure using control button 2 e A chime will sound confirming that a memory position has been set A position can be recalled e in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on e only in P Park or N Neutral if the ignition is on A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter ma unlock control Gf the transmitter is programmed to a memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for more information on how to use the keypad refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter Easy entry exit feature if equipped This feature automatically moves the driver s seat rearward 2 in 5 cm when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the key is removed from the ignition cylinder The seat will move forward to the original position when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the key is placed in the ignition cylinder Heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or ot
192. icantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAA BC The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 182 Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive
193. icle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated malfunction and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning l
194. ifications EPA fuel economy estimates Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates Contact your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM C Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park i
195. ight is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is 201 Tires Wheels and Loading under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that only cable chains are used with steel wheels of the same size and specifications as chains may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and cable chains e Install cable chains only on the front wheels e Use only cable chains on 17 inch wheels with P235 65R17 tires e Do not use tire chains cables or optional traction devices with 18 inch 20 inch or 22 i
196. in If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again keeping the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above cranking speeds this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least one inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below O F 18 C WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury 218 Driving WARNING To reduce the risk of electrica
197. in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle WARNING Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed Introduction A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before L ip touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this r
198. including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 197 Tires Wheels and Loading The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed The pressure sensor is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is re
199. ind spot mirror it will transition to the driver s peripheral field of view 8 A WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear 234 Driving ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a full time All Wheel Drive AWD system With the AWD option power will be delivered to the front wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no maintenance If your vehicle is equipped with AWD a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used A dissimilar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive and could damage the system Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for severe off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty Driving off highway with AWD vehicles AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand snow mud a
200. ind the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 266 Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Re
201. ing Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 320 Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out like brakes and shocks The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings Spark plugs except e Shock absorbers California
202. ion From either position the control will automatically return to the 2 or O off position TILT TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull the lever down to unlock the steering column 2 While the lever is in the down position move the steering wheel up or down and in or out until you find the desired position 3 While holding the steering wheel in place pull the lever up to its original position to lock the steering column WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving 73 Driver Controls ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp Slide on rod feature The visor will slide back and forth on the rod for increased sunlight coverage Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package Forward storage bin if equipped The storage compartment may be used to store a pair of sunglasses Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the storage compartment The door will open to full open position 74 Driver Controls CENTER CONSOLE IF EQUIPP
203. isabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 259 Roadside Emergencies 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 260 Roadside Emergencies 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative termina
204. it in a child safety seat belt positioning generally children who are less than booster seat 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 lbs 86 kg and upward to 100 lbs 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer 163 Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children A Recommended lt 4 Child size height weight or age Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle longer properly fit in a belt positioning safety belt having booster seat generally children who are the lap belt snug at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters and low across the tall or greater than 80 lb 36 kg or hips shoulder belt 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by child centered across restraint manufacturer the shoulder and chest and seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 86 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that chi
205. ite radio channel preset depending on which media mode you are in MEDIA Press repeatedly to select e AM FM1 FM2 or CD e DVD FES Gf equipped e SATI SAT2 or SAT3 Satellite radio mode if equipped e LINE IN Auxiliary input jack SYNC system hands free control feature if equipped Press th briefly to use the voice command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold mg to exit voice command Press f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to end a call or exit phone mode Press lt q PP to scroll through various menus and selections Press OK to confirm your selection For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement 82 Driver Controls Navigation system SYNC hands free control features if equipped Press Th control briefly until the voice mg icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press f to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to exit phone mode or end a call For further information on the Navigation system SYNC system refer to the Navigation System and SYNC supplements PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF AND POWER SUNSHADES IF EQUIPPED The panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade controls are located on the overhead console WARNING Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade o
206. ition within two seconds after the window reaches the bounce back position pull and hold the switch up and the window will travel up with no bounce back or pinch protection If the switch is released before the window is fully closed the window will stop For example this can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the window or seals 77 Driver Controls Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Accessory delay With accessory delay the audio system power windows and moon roof if equipped operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the on to the off position or until either front door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror which has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the ve
207. itions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turnaround because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Your vehicle has anti lock brakes therefore apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice Note Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direc
208. l down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Second row comfort guide The second row outboard lap shoulder belt is equipped with a belt comfort guide This guide is attached to the head restraint and is A stored in a pocket in the seatback n It is used to adjust the comfort of the shoulder belt for smaller occupants in the outboard second row seats 140 Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the comfort guide 1 Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide 2 Slide the guide up or down along the webbing so that the belt is centered on the occupant s shoulder WARNING Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611022 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer i
209. l have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 112 Locks and Security 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock S gt control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 Press the power door unlock control twice within five seconds Note The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been deactivated The horn will chirp once and honk once one short and one long to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position to exit the procedure Note The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Illuminated exit e When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the ignition the interior dome lamps and the exterior mirror puddle lamps if equipped will illuminate The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse or e the key is inserted in the ignition Battery saver The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position
210. l of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 86 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage 293 Maintenance and Specifications e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased
211. l of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 261 Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 262 Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 263 Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional to
212. l shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to
213. lationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 267 Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payabl
214. ldren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 164 Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children below by X LATCH LATCH lower lower Restraint Child anchors anchors Type Weight Faire Up to Faire 48 lb child seat 21 kg WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death 165 Seating a
215. leting Step 1 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating e Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal e Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section 87 Driver Controls Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button AT Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate O operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot be erased e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds H
216. ll not erase the previous set speed Resuming a set speed Press and release RESUME This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed Increasing speed while using speed control To set a higher speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap up function Press and release SET to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and release SET Reducing speed while using speed control To reduce a set speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap down function Press and release SET to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then press SET Turning off speed control To turn off the speed control Press OFF or turn off the ignition Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased 81 Driver Controls STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED These controls allow you to operate some radio control features Radio control features VOL Volume Press to increase the volume VOL Volume Press to decrease the volume lt lt PP Seek Press to select the previous next radio station preset CD track or satell
217. load is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 203 Tires Wheels and Loading Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION FRONT 2 REAR 3 SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs eee FRONT LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI REAR LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI SPARE T145 80D1
218. lts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set 216 Driving e Make sure the gearshift is in P Park 3 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start M Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start If there is difficulty in turning the key rotate the steering wheel until the Aa key turns freely This condition may occur when e the front wheels are turned e a front wheel is against the curb 217 Driving 2 Turn the key to 4 start then release the key as soon as the engine begins cranking Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system that assists in starting the engine After releasing the key from the 4 start position the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Note Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off position 3 After idling for a few seconds release the parking brake apply the brake shift into gear and drive Note If the engine does not start on the first try turn the key to the off position wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 aga
219. luid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System gi EY Master Lighting Switch Af r Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Vas Windshield GY Defrost Demist 10 See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Windows IES Power Window Lockout PAY Front Rear Child Safety Door M Interior Luggage Lock Unlock Compartment Release K P E Panic Alarm Engine Oil Engine Coolant Temperature E yr Engine Coolant BX Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid COPO CH 8 D gt Lj Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter Frits Compartment o gt Jack lt o Check Fuel Cap pS a ere 1i Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause extensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulbs work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for addition
220. mber your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system while attempting to rock the vehicle Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander 236 Driving Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as
221. mfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable Load leveling adjustment if applicable 253 Roadside Emergencies When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface activate hazard flashers and set the parking brake 2 Place the gearshift lever in P Park and turn the engine off Removing the spare tire and jack 1 Lift the carpeted load floor panel located in the rear of the vehicle 2 Remove the spare tire cover if equipped 3 Remove the wing nut securing the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise 4 Remove the plastic washer 5 Lift and remove the temporary spare tire from the cargo area 6 Remove the jack assembly from the vehicle Loosen the bag tabs and remove the jack and lug wrench from the bag 7 Fold down the wrench socket used to loosen the lug nuts and operate the jack 254 Roadside Emergencies Tire change procedure WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not pre
222. mperature interior mirrors Floor mats 318 Accessories Lifestyle Ash cup coin holder Cargo organization and management Cross bars Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories Peace of mind Remote start Keyless entry keypad Cargo security shade Wheel locks For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the
223. mps are turned on D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking brake on chime Sounds when the parking brake is left on and the vehicle is driven If the warning stays on after the park brake is off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Message center activation chime Sounds when some warning messages appear in the message center display for the first time Overspeed chime if equipped Sounds when the vehicle speed reaches 75 mph 120 km h or higher 16 Instrument Cluster GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool N WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 17 Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the on position The fuel gauge may vary slightl
224. n 5 Wait a few seconds and return the key to off 6 Make another check for leaks 7 If no leaks are apparent restart the vehicle FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are H identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire 244 Roadside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Cartridge Fuse link maxi rating fuses cartridge 5A Rea __ Se ae a e e 25a Natural Natural o aoa Orange Green Green soa Red f rea Rea eoa Bue Yellow Yelow Coa ton Brown Peon Natural Black Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located behind a trim panel on the left side of the driver s footwell near the parking brake To remove the trim panel slide the release lever to the right then pull the trim panel out To remove the fuse panel cover press in the tabs on both sides of the cover then pull the cover off To reinstall the fuse panel cover place the top part of the cover on the
225. n any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines PANORAMIC ROOF DEFLECTOR IF EQUIPPED Vacuum the wind deflector cloth to remove insects amp loose dirt Clean with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 276 Cleaning INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfac
226. n to lower the head restraint Folding down the 60 40 rear seats Note The head restraints should be placed in the full down position before folding the seatback down Note Ensure that no objects such as books purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of on or under the second row seat cushion before actuating the release lever to cycle the seats to the load floor position WARNING To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts ensure that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to the load floor position 2nd row manual folding seat To fold down the rear seat pull up on the lever on the outboard side of the seat cushion and let the seatback rotate downward into the load floor position 129 Seating and Safety Restraints 2nd row EasyFold seatback release if equipped WARNING Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down Folding the seat while occupied could result in damage to the seat or injury Note The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park and the lifgate has been open for less than 10 minutes The control buttons are located on the left hand rear quarter trim panel accessible from the liftgate area Press and hold the control mechanism to lower the seatback The top portion lowers the right 40 seatback and the bottom portion lowers the left 60 seatback a Returning the 2nd row seatback to the upright posi
227. nality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used WARNING Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for
228. napi 277 CEROTTI S EA E EE T 12 lighting up panel and ACETIL seses aceeecseethivvanasestecacacdeis 64 J JACK rairai E AS 252 POSI N NE cccssesssessesaddaseessencae 252 SANON ge 11 A 252 Jump starting your vehicle 258 K Keyless entry system AULOLOCK wa sisandisoesacts O AT 102 keypad seccare nonesa nis 114 locking and unlocking 6 OLOTE E A T AE 115 programming entry code 114 KGS nae a e 101 117 positions of the ignition 215 L Lamps autolamp system c cccceeeees 62 bulb replacement specifications chart 0 68 daytime running light 63 TOS lamps 2cdscudveeewtnstheseistacret 63 headlamps ceeeecesesseeeeeesseeees 62 headlamps flash to pass 63 instrument panel dimming 64 interior lamps 66 67 69 replacing bulbs 0 0 69 LATCH anchors ccccceceeeeees 171 Liftgate oo 94 95 100 109 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 221 326 Load limits wo ceeeceeeeseeeeees 202 Locks AUTOLOCK nrinn 102 ChIGDLOOR sasinen 106 GOONS oaren 102 Lubricant specifications 312 L g MUS ecn aan 257 Lumbar support seats 123 M Message center secisisorisi 19 20 english metric button 24 system check button 24 Mirrors nananana nen 78 79 automatic dimming rearview IMITTOT peores Ta EEEE 78 fold AWAY eceececccecesseeeeesteeees 79 WG AGO ec
229. nch wheels and tires Drive cautiously If you hear the cable chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and re tighten the cable chains If this does not work remove the cable chains to prevent damage to your vehicle If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Remove the tire cable chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire cable chains on dry roads e The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and cable chains VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will 202 Tires Wheels and Loading provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment PAYLOAD Pay
230. nd Safety Restraints WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician t
231. nd rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the highway When driving at slow speeds off highway under high outside temperatures use L Low gear when possible L Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Basic operating principles e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice 235 Driving If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover Reme
232. ne soon C indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon C indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter 300 Maintenance and Specifications ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates em
233. ner Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others e Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling 297 Maintenance and Specifications e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel filler cap When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the filler cap clockwise until at least a few clicks are heard If the check fuel cap light R or a check fuel cap message comes on
234. ng a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the brake shift interlock lever while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into the N Neutral position 6 Install the trim panel 2 and chrome ring 1 in reverse order 7 Apply brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 228 Driving WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning Your transmission is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in the vehicle computer This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a
235. ng airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback 156 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon bag airbag with a gas generator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar one on each side of t
236. ng and releasing the buttons corresponding to the settings you circled 4 After inputting switch settings simultaneously press and release all three Car2U system buttons The indicator lights will turn on 5 Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the garage door O O O Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves During this time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Do not release the button until you see the garage door move Most garage doors open quickly You may need to hold the button from 5 55 seconds before observing movement of the garage door 6 The indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete If your garage door opener does not operate following these steps repeat Steps 2 through 6 Otherwise call the toll free Car2U help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons Note The system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it will be necessary to erase the current settings using the pro
237. ng or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area The liftgate could be damaged against a garage door low ceiling or wall e Do not hang anything bike rack etc from the spoiler glass or liftgate Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components 94 Driver Controls e Do not leave the liftgate open while driving Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle WARNING Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate door open keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air comes into the vehicle Liftgate ajar signal If the liftgate is not fully latched you will receive a LIFTGATE AJAR message on the instrument panel If you see this message check the liftgate door to ensure it is fully latched Note In the event of a power failure the latch can be accessed and released from the inside using the access panel on the liftgate trim POWER LIFTGATE IF EQUIPPED You can power open or close the liftgate with the following controls e Instrument panel control button e Integrated keyhead transmitter button e Outside liftgate control button e Control button in the rear cargo area Opening and Closing the power liftgate WARNING Make sure all pers
238. nhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover WARNING If the Safety Canopy system has deployed the Safety Canopy will not function again unless replaced The Safety Canopy system including the A B C and D pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the Safety Canopy is not replaced it will not function again which will increase the risk of injury in a future collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required 161 Seating and Safety Restraints Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness airbag light same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition
239. nly with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 I 1 Play Pause This control is operational in CD and DVD mode if equipped When a CD or DVD is playing in the FES system press this control to play or pause the current CD DVD The CD DVD status will display in the radio display For further information on the FES DVD system if equipped refer to Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter OK Use in various menu selections Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK For further information refer to the SYNC supplement 7 SHUFFLE Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER In folder mode press FOLDER P to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode press lt A FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 44 Entertainment Systems 10 FF Fast for
240. nt of 34 F 86 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 290 Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir COLD FILL RANGE e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding
241. ntinuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light B RAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti lock Braking System ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance 220 Driving ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If ABS
242. ntroller with associated wiring installed to your vehicle by an authorized dealer WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps Your vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and monitor your vehicle lamps Splicing into the wiring or attaching wiring to the vehicle bulb may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps or cause them not to function properly Your lamp outage feature may also be disabled or provide incorrect information 211 Tires Wheels and Loading Trailer tow connector equipped on vehicles with a Class Il trailer tow prep package The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper on the driver s side of the vehicle Refer to the following chart for information regarding the factory equipped trailer tow connector Trailer tow connector flasher flasher Tail lampa parking Jamps Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components do not trailer tow during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of
243. o BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 269 Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast
244. o enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 103 Locks and Security Keyless entry keypad autolock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all the doors l 4 E5 TE 9 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Autounlock feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is in the on position all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the off or accessory position and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the off or accessory position Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features
245. o make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be 166 Seating and Safety Restraints restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision
246. o not add fluid if the level is in this range 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately 307 Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is warmed up approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a t
247. o not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation 288 Maintenance and Specifications WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Pa
248. ol 6 The message center will prompt you to press RESET to calibrate or press INFO to exit Press RESET to start the compass calibration function 22 Instrument Cluster 7 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED It could take up to five circles to complete calibration 8 The compass is now calibrated System check and vehicle feature customization Press SETUP repeatedly to cycle the message center through the following features SETUP RESET PRESS RESET FOR SYS CHECK For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for two to four seconds Press RESET to cycle through each of the systems being monitored The sequence of the system check report is as follows DOORS CLOSED ENGINE TEMPERATURE OIL PRESSURE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WASHER FLUID LEVEL FUEL LEVEL DISTANCE TO EMPTY UNITS Displays the current units English or Metric Press RESET to change from English to Metric AUTOLAMP SEC The autolamp delay feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off Press RESET to select the new autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds AUTOLOCK This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion Non F
249. oll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control RSC the sliding car icon igi in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability Control system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle 225 Driving The Roll Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC If the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system press the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button Full features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system can be restored by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again or by turning off and restarting the engine If yo switch off the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon igi will illuminate steadily Pressing the An eee with RSC Off button again will turn off the sliding car icon R In R Reverse ABS and the Engine and Br
250. omeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 88 Driver Controls Car2U Home Automation System if equipped The Car2U Home Automation System is a universal transmitter located in the driver s visor that O O includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home The Car2U system s garage door opener function replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the interior of your vehicle After being programmed for garage doors the Car2U system transmitter can be programmed to operate security devices and home lighting systems WARNING Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Do not use the Car2U system with any garage door opener t
251. ommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated 185 Tires Wheels and Loading Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire t
252. ons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control WARNING Keep keys out of reach of children Do not allow children to play near an open or moving power liftgate The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P Park When the liftgate is being power closed a chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to power close A single chime indicates a problem with the close request caused by e the ignition is in on and the transmission is not in P Park e or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage 95 Driver Controls e or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request a fast continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut failure If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster chime have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the power system will permit This will activate the obstacle detection feature Note Cycling the ignition prior to completely latching the liftgate could result in damage to the liftgate and or its power components Make sure the liftgate is fully latched before operating the vehicle Care should be exercised in starting the engine before the liftgate is fully closed latched If the ignition is cycled during a liftgate power close cycle and the lift
253. ontrol is in the off position 2 Open the hood 3 Reach over the front bolster 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from the lamp assembly 5 Carefully pull the bulb out of the socket and push in the new bulb 6 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise Replacing tail stop turn sidemarker backup lamp bulbs The tail stop turn sidemarker backup lamp bulbs are located in the same portion of the tail lamp assembly one just below the other Follow the same steps to replace either bulb 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and then open the liftgate to expose the lamp assembly bolts 2 Remove the two bolts from the lamp assembly 3 Carefully remove the lamp assembly away from the vehicle by pulling the assembly straight out to expose the bulb socket DO NOT TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 5 Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb 70 Lights 6 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise 7 Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the lamp assembly with two bolts Replacing high mount brake lamp bulbs Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high mount stop lamp It is designed to last the life of the vehicle If replacement is required see your autho
254. or temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire a 1S4 09 OL aw Wo Ssn Kast 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 196 Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safe
255. ou do not know if your garage door opener is a rolling code or fixed code device open your garage door opener s remote control battery cover If a panel of DIP switches is present your garage door opener is a fixed code device If not your garage door opener is a rolling code device Rolling code programming Note Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves time sensitive actions Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so you will know which actions are time sensitive If you do not follow the time sensitive actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter NS 1 Firmly press the two outer Car2U system buttons for 1 2 seconds then release 90 Driver Controls 2 Go to the garage to locate the garage door opener motor and its learn button You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the unit s cover or light lens to locate the learn button Press the learn button after which you will have 10 30 seconds to return to your vehicle and complete the following steps If you cannot locate the learn button refer to the Owner s Guide of your garage door opener or call the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 3 Return
256. ough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the 208 Tires Wheels and Loading calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 lb 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 82 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow option package Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension For your safety and to maximize vehicle performance be sure to use the proper equipment while towing When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and on steep grades the A C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine from overheating This may result in a temporary increase of interior temperatures Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure
257. our AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN 222 Driving WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon R will illuminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled press the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button located on the center of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon yi still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving situations e Traction Control TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction Electronic Stability Control ESC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically enables each time the engine is started All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it The AdvanceTrac with RSC system includes an AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button on the g
258. ovide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 232 The RSS detects obstacles up to six feet two meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the system refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free
259. p control The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for approximately 20 seconds or if equipped with a message center you can select a delay from 0 180 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off See Message center in the Instrument cluster chapter e To turn autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise e To turn autolamps off rotate the control to the off position Note Some vehicles may be equipped with a headlamps on with windshield wipers feature If the windshield wipers are turned on for a fixed period of time the exterior lamps will turn on with headlamp control in the Autolamp position 62 Lights Fog lamp control if equipped 0 The headlamp control also operates the fog lamps The fog lamps can be turned on when the headlamp control is in the PS 2D or positions and the high beams are not turned on Pull the headlamp control towards you to turn the fog lamps on The fog lamp indicator light will illuminate High beams ZO Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever towards you to deactivate Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on at reduced intensity output To activate e
260. p to disengage in a collision which may result in personal injury bp Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage 299 Maintenance and Specifications Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems try a different brand of unleaded gasoline If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank
261. plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 311 Maintenance and Specifications ad 60IN dsa STX 10 DX V FdEINW YSH 9TX TV S9D9IN SSM 10 Y G9O9IN SSM O T Wd uoneIyn ds p10 Jequinu 1ed p104 queoliqn J907 pue asuTy 100p Joly Jong pue syors yeas soye d 1ayl1 s sasuTy 100p DIT pooy Areqrxne yel pooy yoye 100q asvely sodng YmMW queouqny Aerdsg suog sdiijsioyyeom I00q pm ayeIg IPA 100 IIOAIOSOI UO YYW LOG WuUPLULIOJ 10g pue NIW Useemjog 4SH IJeI01070 1N sJ3ILI9VdY ANY SNOILVOISIDAdS LONGOYd JONVYNALNIVN pry aeg N co oD Maintenance and Specifications V L6OTOGN dSM TO 06M08 AX AT eNOOUdIN NTO O15LX A eNOOUdN WO S LX V GGAL6IN SSM epeueg V OI OA0 SN V OT OA RYN UOLT IdV UM V OS606N SSM epeueg GISATO6MS OXD epeen 6TdSTO6MG OX0 SN SAO 0ZMS OX SN dSO 0z Ms OXe uoneIyn ds pIo Joquinu j1ed pIo JUBOTIQI T oxy Ieoy UNIA 06 M08 AVS Ve19 10 0 pl lV AT oNODYAN Ve10 10 0 ALV A oNODUYYAN 4eI1070 z Jue OOD sUIsUy User Ayeroedg yyes1910 0 epeue TO 1090W NOUA OG MS AVS YEIDIOJON e epeueg TIO AOjOW WNTWeLg I9dng OG MS AVS YEIDIO0JON e sn TO 10101 oNeyWAS MA 0Z MG AVS YLeIDIOJON e SA TO 1090W pus g oey
262. prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order 219 Driving How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater will use 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal co
263. products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 275 Cleaning WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clea
264. ption performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible 52 Entertainment Systems Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle e Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music channels over the internet using any computer connected to the internet U S customers only For information on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rear
265. pty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting dow medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent 301 Maintenance and Specifications Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added in gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2
266. r leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves WARNING When closing the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade opening Note Do not attempt to move the panoramic power sunshades manually or sunshade damage or malfunction may occur The sunshade track clips are designed to release the sunshade crossbar in order to prevent damage to the system If this occurs the sunshade crossbar ends may just need to be slid back into position to regain proper function See your authorized dealer for proper panoramic Vista Roof or sunshade operating diagnostic or repair instructions Note The same control operates both the sunshades and the panoramic Vista Roof The panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade are equipped with an automatic one touch express opening feature To stop motion at any time during the one touch operation press the control a second time 83 Driver Controls To open power sunshades and panoramic Vista Roof Press and release the as control to open the sunshade The front and rear sunshades open simultaneously Note Vista Roof will only open after power sunshades are completely open Power sunshades will only close after Vista Roof is completely closed To open the panoramic
267. r pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 227 Driving If the fuse is not blown and the brakelamps are working properly the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P Park 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition key to the off position and remove the key 2 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully pry off and remove the chrome trim ring 1 from the shifter base 3 Open the storage compartment lid and carefully pry the trim panel 2 up from rear attachments on the storage compartment and disconnect it from the console 4 Locate the brake shift interlock lever on the passenger side of the shifter assembly 5 Apply the brake pedal Usi
268. r tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life 190 Tires Wheels and Loading e Front Wheel Drive FWD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram AAMAS XV AANAAA Se YY XANAX YY XAAANA BR Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and whe
269. raffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to hitp jwww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 272 Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for bes
270. railer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal operating temperature Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid MIN lt q MAX level is at the bottom of the MIN sei MAX dipstick Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 93 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 80 km of driving 308 Maintenance and Specifications The transmission fluid should be MIN within the cross hatch area if at C SS normal operating temperature 4
271. rake warning light also is illuminated Airbag readiness If this light fails ee y to illuminate when the ignition is turned to on continues to flash or IN remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Charging system lluminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Engine oil pressure lluminates when the oil pressure falls below the im normal range refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter AdvanceTrac Traction Control active Illuminates when the AdvanceTrac Traction Control is active If the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to the Driving chapter for more information 14 Instrument Cluster Low tire pressure warning if equipped lluminates when your tire pressure is low If the light O remains on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be ch
272. rammed it will not start your vehicle s engine and or will not operate the remote entry features The theft indicator light may flash on and off Wait 20 seconds and you may repeat Steps 1 through 8 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key s programmed To program additional new unprogrammed key s wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 119 Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while
273. range add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously 53 Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does system failure not clear within a short present period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not available available at thi
274. rating e whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled e how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e how fast the vehicle was traveling e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel and e longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location using GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors Introduction To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada To the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location and or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 opera
275. ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 192 Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law STN po NT 8 mph 140 kv E k PQ 99 mph 59 rv k PR 106 mph ATL rv pT 8 mph 190 kv P80 mph 210 kwh pW 68 mph 27D kwh pK 186 mph 299 kv Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For tho
276. rd Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this Owner s Guide 155 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system Determining if the system is operational The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light e P for front and side airbag system will either flash or stay lit IN e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system fe WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deployi
277. re three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed 49 Entertainment Systems CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached 4 P 50 Entertainment Systems adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage
278. required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs AWD Systems if equipped With AWD the vehicle uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of time This will cause the AWD system to overheat If the rear tires stop spinning whil
279. rial spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s seatbelts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth e If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholster
280. ring this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction Control TCS Traction Control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control Engine Traction Control works to limit drive wheel spin by momentarily reducing engine power Brake Traction Control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction Control is most active at low speeds During Traction Control events the sliding car icon in the instrument cluster will flash If the Traction Control system is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation Traction Control will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all features Anti lock braking RSC and ESC are not affected by this condition and will continue to function during the cool down period The Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC sec
281. rized dealer Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position 2 Press the lever and carefully pry the license plate lamp assembly located above the license plate from the liftgate 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 4 Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb 7 5 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise 6 To install carefully press the lamp assembly into liftgate Replacing fog lamp bulbs if equipped 1 Make sure the fog lamp switch is in the off position 2 From underneath the vehicle remove splash shield and rotate the harness bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove from the fog lamp 3 Carefully disconnect the bulb from the harness assembly via the two snap clips Install the new bulb in reverse order 71 Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Speed dependent wipers When the wiper control is on the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust with the vehicle speed The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the wipers will go Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick press and hold the wipers will
282. rk turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned 289 Maintenance and Specifications If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized R4 A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze poi
283. ront park turn signal 3157NAK amber Rear sidemarker lamp Stop tail turn lamp Backup lamp License plate lamp High mount brake lamp Fog lamp if equipped Map lamp Second row dome reading Rear courtesy lamp Visor vanity lamp Slide on Rod system SOR Cif equipped All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer To replace these lamps see your authorized dealer Lights Replacing interior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Open the hood 3 Reach over the front bolster 4 Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and then pulling it straight out 5 Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb 6 Connect the electrical connector on the bulb WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated 7 Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned turn the new bulb clockwise to install 69 Lights Replacing front parking lamp turn signal bulbs 1 Make sure that the headlamp c
284. ront passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Gf equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system In case there is a problem with the e P front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness light in the IN instrument cluster will stay lit If the airbag readiness light is lit do the following The driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged and or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat Remove the obstruction s Gf found Restart the vehicle e Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is no longer illuminated If the airbag readiness light remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Fo
285. round 4 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 5 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 6 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 7 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 256 ig A lye TK Roadside Emergencies Stowing the flat spare tire and jack 1 Fully collapse the jack fold the wrench socket into the handle and place them both into the bag making sure to secure the tabs 2 Place the jack assembly in the spare tire well aligning it with the two vertical studs 3 Place the tire in the spare tire well over the jack assembly If you are stowing a flat 22 inch tire and wheel assembly temporarily remove the load floor plastic stowage bins and the foam load floor supports to make space for the 22 inch tire and wheel assembly Place the 22 inch tire amp wheel assembly in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is able to protrude through a wheel opening Replace the plastic stowage bins and foam supports around t
286. rse Park Aid if equipped e Autolamp if equipped Odometer Trip odometer Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note Engine can not be running to change the state of Autolamp or Rear Park Assist when not in Reverse Autolamp if equipped This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off 1 To disable enable the autolamp delay feature select this function using TRIP RESET stem for the AL 30 current display mode 2 Press and hold the TRIP RESET stem for two seconds to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds 19 Instrument Cluster Reverse Sensing System Park assist if equipped This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected 1 To disable enable the reverse sensing system feature select this function using the TRIP RESET PA OFF D stem or put the vehicle in R Reverse 2 Press and hold the TRIP RESET stem for two seconds to turn the rear park assist OFF or ON MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime The message center display is located in the instrument cluster Info Press I
287. rtance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use 178 Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s ins
288. rtrain control system This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire 215 Driving WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions When the engine starts the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety be
289. s refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the accessory position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program located on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 3 Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the
290. s feature allows the driver s window to open or close fully without holding the control down 76 Driver Controls To operate one touch down e Press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation If the switch is pressed and held to the normal close or one touch up position during a one touch down event the window will stop If after 1 2 second the switch is still held the window will perform a normal close or one touch up To operate one touch up e Pull the switch completely up to the second detent and release quickly The window will close fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation If the switch is pressed and held to the normal open or one touch down position during a one touch up event the window will stop If after 1 2 second the switch is still held the window will perform a normal open or one touch down Bounce Back When the window is moving upward and an obstacle or a rough road condition interferes with the window s movement the window will automatically reverse direction and move down This is known as bounce back If the ignition is turned off without accessory delay being active during bounce back the window will move down until the bounce back position is reached Security override To override a bounce back cond
291. s time on this channel The system is working properly NO TEXT Song title information Song title information not available not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 54 Entertainment Systems NO TEXT Category information Category information not available not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from You are in a location the SIRIUS satellite or that is blocking the SIRIUS tower to the SIRIUS signal i e vehicle antenna tunnel under an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return UPDATING Update of channel No action required The programming in process may take up to progress three minutes CALL SIRIUS Satellite service has Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 been deactivated by 1 888 539 7474 to SIRIUS Satellite re activate or resolve Radio subscription issues NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system Refer to the Navigation System supplement for further information SYNC IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC section in the Navigation system supplement if equipped 55 Climate Controls MANUAL HEATING
292. safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt nine times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state e After Step 3 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again 146 Seating and Safety Restraints AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS Important supplemental restraint system precautions Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING W
293. se with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 193 Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e
294. seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit and stay unlit 152 Seating and Safety Restraints If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that p
295. secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 162 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http Awww nhtsa dot gov Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children i Recommended ae Child size height weight or age e vee Children weighing 40 lb 18 kg or less Use a child safety generally age four or younger seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Small Children who have outgrown or no Use a children longer properly f
296. setting Use A IV to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A IV to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers Press OK to close and return to the main menu SPEED VOL Speed sensitive volume Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A IV to adjust Press OK to close and return to the main menu The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 7 8 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting 34 Entertainment Systems TRACK FOLDER MODE Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In track mode press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to scroll through all tracks on the disc In folder mode press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to scroll through tracks within the selected folder Pre
297. ss lt Q FOLDER FOLDER P gt to access the previous next folder if available Press OK to close and return to the main menu COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use W to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level Press OK to close and return to the main menu SINGLE PLAY DUAL PLAY if equipped If SINGLE PLAY is ON press A IV for DUAL PLAY For further information on Single Play Dual Play refer to the Family entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped LINE IN auxiliary audio mode SYNC if equipped and SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes satellite radio if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC chapter in the Navigation supplement for further information press lt q gt to access the previous next strong station In CD mode press lt q i
298. ssage center 98 Driver Controls CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo management system if equipped The cargo management system consists of storage compartments located in the floor of the rear cargo area 1 To open lift the release handle and the lid 2 To close lower the lid Cargo net if equipped The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area Attach the net to the loops and anchors provided WARNING This net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision 99 Driver Controls Utility hook The utility hook can be used to hang small items such as grocery bags etc Do not hang more than 10 Ib 4 5 kg on the hook D ROOF RACK SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel For proper function of the roof rack system loads must be placed directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails Your vehicle may be equipped with factory installed crossbars Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle are also recommended for use with your roof rack system The vehicle s roof panel is NOT designed to directly carry a load The maximum recommended load is 100 lb 45 kg evenly distributed on the crossbars Ensure that the load is securely fastened WARNING When loading the roof rail crossbars it is recommended to evenly distribute the load as well as maintain a low center of gravity
299. ssion damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 241 Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized de
300. ssure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Tire Possible Customer Action Required Pressure cause Warning Light Solid Warning Tire s 1 Check your tire pressure to Light under inflated ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light will turn OFF Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated malfunction and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 200 Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Possible Customer Action Required Pressure cause Warning Light Flashing Warning Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in Light use use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the veh
301. swipe three times with washer fluid e along press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper rainlamp feature if equipped with Autolamp When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off 72 Driver Controls Rear window wiper washer controls For rear wiper operation rotate the rear window wiper and washer control to the desired position Select 2 Normal speed operation of rear wiper 1 Intermittent operation of rear wiper O off Rear wiper and washer off For rear wash cycle rotate and hold as desired the rear wiper washer control to either CJ posit
302. t as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar one on each side of the vehicle e Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors one on each side of the vehicle e Rollover sensor in the restraints control module RCM The Safety Canopy system in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision or rollover event Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the second or third row seats The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening 160 Seating and Safety Restraints The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain lateral collisions or rollover events the Safety Canopy system will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further e
303. t center of the instrument panel and OFF a sliding car icon gi in the instrument cluster The sliding car icon 44 in the instrument cluster will illuminate temporarily during start up as part of a normal system self check or during driving if a driving situation causes the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the sliding car icon R illuminates steadily verify that the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is not manually disabled by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button located on the center of the instrument panel If the sliding car icon R remains steadily illuminated have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The message center will also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system 223 Driving When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience the following A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The sliding car f indicator light will flash e A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel du
304. t and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with tether straps Mo Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle 173 Seating and Safety Restraints The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under the second row seat gap cover marked with tether anchor symbols shown with title The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions Lb shown from top view n 8 i WARNING Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached som
305. t outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in rollover and side collisions when the Safety Canopy is activated This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management feature front outboard section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The Restraints Control Module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors driver seat position sensor and front passenger sensin
306. t results Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Exterior chrome Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environm
307. ted the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled 143 Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 o
308. ted entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition is turned to the on position or e the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad Gf equipped or e after 25 seconds of illumination The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open Perimeter lamps illuminated entry With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system the following items will illuminate when the OQ unlock control on the transmitter is pressed e Parking lamps e Sidemarker lamps e Tail lamps e Interior lamps The lamps will automatically turn off e if the ignition switch is turned to the on position or e the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad if equipped or e after 25 seconds of illumination Note On some vehicles the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature will not activate in daylight conditions Deactivating activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry You may enable disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by your authorized dealer You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to enable disable the perimeter lamps feature Note Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure wil
309. th the driver and passenger side in single zone 59 Climate Controls 13 AUTO To engage automatic temperature control press AUTO and select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow distribution A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 14 EXT Press to display outside temperature Press again to display cabin temperature settings Note Exterior readings are more accurate when the vehicle is moving Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather select GV defrost or YA floor defrost e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system OFF or with A recirculated air engaged and A C off e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the max A C mode reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the PARK gear position to continue to receive cool air from your A
310. the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature this feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned to the on position The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on using the dimmer control or e any door is open The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to the off position Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re enabled by simultaneously pressing the and controls on the IKT for four seconds disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously The turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two stage unlock was enabled or disabled Locking the doors amp 1 Press A and release to lock all the doors The turn lamps will flash 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash once if all the doors and liftgate are closed 108 Locks and Security Note If any door or the liftgate is not closed the horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash Opening the power liftgate if equipped 5 Press 5 twice within three seconds to fully unlatch and open the liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of th
311. the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately by an authorized dealer Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned on until the BRAKE parking brake is released WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected 221 Driving Press the parking brake pedal downward again to release the parking brake Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy Note If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake applied a chime will sound ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC
312. the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mil
313. tion WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that the latches are engaged An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches in the upright position The seatback will click when it is locked into position 130 Seating and Safety Restraints Adjusting the second row seatback WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision The second row seat reclines for additional comfort To adjust the second row seatback to the desired position while seated pull the release lever up and push the seatback rearward Seat mounted armrest and cupholders Your vehicle is equipped with a rear seat armrest To fold the armrest down release the latch located on the seatback by pressing down and pulling forward 131 Seating and Safety Restraints To access the cup holders lift up one of the slotted areas on the cover WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision Returning the 2nd row armrest to the upright position Close the cover on the cup
314. tion resulting in loss of control Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage 258 Roadside Emergencies Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the d
315. tion below 224 Driving Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Stability Control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally During Electronic Stability Control events the sliding car icon f in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Electronic Stability Control system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces e Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa e Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter The Electronic Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac with RSC section following Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll stability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s r
316. tion in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components 283 Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle O from the wiper arm Press the lock tab to release the blade and pull the SB G5 wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended
317. tion on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop 239 Driving Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti lock brake system ABS do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying
318. tion on Single Play Dual Play refer to the Family entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped LINE IN auxiliary audio mode SYNC if equipped and SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes satellite radio if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter If your vehicle is equipped with the SYNC please refer to the SYNC supplement for further information mode press to access the previous lt q or next gt strong station or track 5 SEEK In radio and CD MP3 43 Entertainment Systems In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt Q SEEK SEEK to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt q SEEK SEEK B gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press lt Q SEEK SEEK P gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press lt 4 SEEK P gt to select a category Satellite radio is available o
319. tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY 252 Roadside Emergencies When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Co
320. to access the previous next CD track 5 SEEK In radio mode 35 Entertainment Systems In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt SEEK SEEK gt to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt SEEK SEEK B gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt SEEK SEEK p to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press lt 4 SEEK SEEK P gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press lt Q SEEK SEEK to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 gt 11 Play Pause This control is operational in CD and DVD mode if equipped When a CD or DVD is playing in the FES system press this control to play or pause the current CD or DVD The CD DVD status will display in the radio display OK Use in various menu selections Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK For further information refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC chapter in the Navigation supplement For further information on the FES DVD system if equipped refer to Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 7 SHUFFLE Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If yo
321. to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element Changing rear window wiper blade The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position This reduces the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash To replace the wiper blade 1 Grab the wiper arm with one hand close to the arm blade joint ee and pull it as far away from the ae glass as possible Do not use excessive force because it can break the wiper arm at the heel Hold it there until the next step 2 Grab the primary structure of the blade with the other hand close to the arm blade joint 3 Grip tightly and press on the arm blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm 284 Maintenance and Specifications 4 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard If you find this procedure too difficult please see your dealer r ENGINE OIL Y7 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and caref
322. to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still working properly Safety belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized dealer and must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in a collision Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions 139 Seating and Safety Restraints The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body at the start of the crash WARNING The driver and front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags seat mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy and safety belt pretensioners Safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments at the front outboard seating positions Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height pull on the center button and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the button and pul
323. tors to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email de
324. tructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 179 Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO CROSSOVER VEHICLE OWNERS Crossover vehicles handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Crossover vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more QT than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneu
325. trument cluster is illuminated OFF 2 Grade Assist e Improves driving experience in hilly terrain or mountainous areas by providing additional grade engine braking and extends lower gear operation on uphill climbs e Provides additional engine braking through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs vehicle acceleration accelerator pedal brake pedal and vehicle speed 230 Driving e Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above This will increase engine RPM during engine braking Overdrive Cancel with Grade Assist is designed to provide optimal gear selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas It is recommended that you return to O D overdrive mode on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transmission function To return to O D overdrive mode press the transmission control switch again e The O D OFF lamp in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated e The transmission will operate in gears one through six O D overdrive mode is automatically returned each time the key is turned off L Low e Provides maximum engine braking e Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle speed allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting
326. turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no electronic interference with the programmed key If the vehicle doesn t start try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful contact your authorized dealership for key replacement If the indicator still flashes rapidly or glows steadily the vehicle will not start contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service 116 Locks and Security Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position The theft indicator will flash every two seconds to act as a theft A deterrent when the vehicle is R armed Automatic disarming The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the on position The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Replacement Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKT and coded keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight keys can be IKTs with remote entry functionality If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock coded
327. ty feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons
328. u wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDERP In folder mode press FOLDER gt to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 36 Entertainment Systems 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode press lt q FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MP38 track 12 Memory presets To set a station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability
329. ully remove the engine oil level dipstick 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again ls Maintenance and Specifications If the oil level is within this range the oil level is acceptable lt a ot DO NOT ADD OIL If the oil level is below this mark engine oil must be added to raise the level within the normal operating range ZOONA esans If required add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine otl in this chapter Do not overfill the engine with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine damage If the engine is overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 286 Maintenance and Specifications 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install th
330. um compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e seat mounted side airbags Refer to Seat mounted side airbag system later in this chapter e safety belt pretensioners e one or more impact and safing sensors 150 Seating and Safety Restraints e a re
331. ur wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer 274 Cleaning ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These
332. uracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Do the following to set the proper zone Compass zone calibration adjustment 1 Determine your magnetic zone by referring to the zone map 2 Start the engine 3 Press INFO repeatedly until only the compass and odometer are displayed the top of the message center must be blank Note If the compass displays CAL 000000 0 mi instead of heading information the compass will need to be calibrated Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CAL indicator changes to display compass heading This may take up to three circles to complete calibration 4 Press and hold the RESET button until the message center display prompts you to reset the current zone setting Press RESET 5 Press SETUP repeatedly to choose the correct zone setting for your geographic location To exit the zone setting mode press and release the RESET contr
333. vent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the vehicle is in P Park WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transmission in P Park set the parking brake and block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Block the diagonally opposite wheel 2 Remove wheel cover if equipped with the lug wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 255 Roadside Emergencies WARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire 3 Align the slot on top of the jack with the sheet metal flange indicated by the jack locator triangle next to the tire you are changing Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the g
334. vers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your Owner s Guide for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS All Wheel Drive AWD System if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a full time All Wheel Drive AWD system With the AWD option power will be delivered to the front wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator 180 Tires Wheels and Loading Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subje
335. vices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios 8 Introduction WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert A N Fasten Safety Belt A Airbag Side fe Child Seat Tether on il Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake F
336. ward Press FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MP38 track 12 Memory presets To set a station select the desired frequency band AM FM1 or FM2 Tune to the desired station Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 18 stations six in AM six in FM1 and FM2 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAWN In radio and A CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK p gt to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press lt SEEK to vi
337. wing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure On FWD vehicles if your vehicle is to be towed from the front ensure proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the ground The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this fashion If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment it is recommended that the front wheels drive wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transmission On AWD vehicles it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to prevent damage to the automatic transmission AWD system or vehicle 264 Roadside Emergencies If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain confi
338. y If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt 278 Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcra
339. y recall feature enter the sixth digit 1 e 2 to store driver 1 settings or 3 e 4 to store driver 2 settings Note Pressing 5 e 6 7 e 8 or 9 e 0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will not recall a driver memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal entry code has been programmed to the module Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code 114 Locks and Security Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered seven times 35 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter e the ignition is turned on Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry To unlock the driver
340. y when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Falling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine e With message center Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle e With Mini Message center oponon Refer to Message center in this chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English NW OOOC0C 0 mi Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys e With mini message center Tap on the TRIP RESET stem to mee 0000 Se toggle the display between the trip Heer and the odometer Press the stem again to select Trip A and Trip B features Holding the TRIP RESET stem for two seconds or more will reset the trip odometer 18 Instrument Cluster e With message center See TRIP A B under Message center TRIP A OR B XXX X mi S NU OO00O0 G mi MINI MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED Selectable features Press and release the TRIP RESET stem to scroll and reset the following functions Select or reset the function by holding the TRIP RESET stem for more than two seconds Info menu This menu displays the following control displays e Odometer e Trip odometer A or B e Reve
341. yudg umuq OSV MG AVS YLeIDIOJOW oueu zred ploy CISTI sud 7 CT 6 8 syzenb p 6 J OAI S I UO YYW pue NIW Usemjog g 18 TD syrenb G gI o IT TD syrenb J TT 12 send g g Amedeo pmE AMY Teup Te y pm uorsstusueI oyewomy pmj suliee s IaMog aseyoed MO Joprel UJIM JULTOOD oUTsUy yuepooo sulsuy lo oulsug 313 Maintenance and Specifications Area ABU suotyeoydde swog Ayede Ty Arp eyewrxoidde ATUO sayeotpu 4 BUTT 10 SUPPOOYO Joao PMY 107 JoTeap pozttoyyne Inod 39G aseulep UOISSTUSULIJ SNLI ACUI prg popusWIWIODI oy Ue 19470 ping Aue Jo SA RAIOJUL IDIAIOS 7991109 OY OUTULIIJOP 0 UOUVWUALOfUL BOUDUBIULDUL Pa NpayIs 0 OJO PINT AT eNOOUAW sn ATU pmoys AT eNOOUW etmMbes Jey suoIsstusueI Iewomy osuel guyeIodo ewou saprnsdp y UO uoneompur oy Aq Jas oq pmoys eae pmyy pue pmyz uorsstusuer JO ymowe 34L T9009 yuey ul ue yy p ddmb j pue zIs I J009 uo paseq Area Aew suoyesndde wog Ayoedeo py Ap eurxordde Auo soyeorpul gporyea nod ut peddimbe ApeurSmo adAy quejoo 94 PPY YILU UOLO TV 9U PUL Y OS6OZN SSM UOHeoyloeds p107 Jo syuswoiMbal ay Joour ATUO p u IO urSuy ATOYEpUeUL JOU ST IO 1070W PUTA oTJeYJUAS 10 IY YJU S JO asf EAP SuOTIeS 8 07 jeoym TTe yue ong T23L OALIP OOUM JUOIJ suoyes Z 6T que pna ZV OTESI ISAN ean pmy SOE J USEM PTOUSPUM 19 F Suenb G 7 i V GE OZ WNT YLIN J YSEM PT OYSPUIM yueoLIqn T V

Ford 2009 E-150 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents